add directory Minix
This commit is contained in:
109399
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN1.PS
Normal file
109399
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN1.PS
Normal file
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
26341
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN2.PS
Normal file
26341
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN2.PS
Normal file
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
28719
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN3.PS
Normal file
28719
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN3.PS
Normal file
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
18715
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN4.PS
Normal file
18715
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN4.PS
Normal file
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
16951
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN5.PS
Normal file
16951
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN5.PS
Normal file
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
432
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN6.PS
Normal file
432
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN6.PS
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,432 @@
|
||||
%!PS-Adobe-1.0
|
||||
%%Creator: devps (Pipeline Associates, Inc.)
|
||||
%%CreationDate: Tue Sep 17 22:37:17 1996
|
||||
%%Pages: (atend)
|
||||
%%DocumentFonts: (atend)
|
||||
|
||||
/devps 180 dict def devps begin
|
||||
/res 10.000000 def
|
||||
/y_offset 843 def
|
||||
/X{exch}bind def
|
||||
/mm {transform round X round X itransform} bind def
|
||||
/r{rmoveto}bind def
|
||||
/m{moveto}bind def
|
||||
/l{lineto}bind def
|
||||
/rl{rlineto}bind def
|
||||
/st{stroke}bind def
|
||||
/gs{gsave}bind def
|
||||
/gr{grestore}bind def
|
||||
/cp{currentpoint}bind def
|
||||
/np{newpath}bind def
|
||||
/ct{curveto}bind def
|
||||
systemdict /setpacking known
|
||||
{ /savepacking currentpacking def true setpacking } if
|
||||
/m0{0 0 moveto}bind def
|
||||
/xc{//res div}bind def
|
||||
/yc{//res neg div //y_offset add}bind def
|
||||
/lc{yc X xc X l st}bind def
|
||||
/mc{yc X xc X m}bind def
|
||||
/el{gs /a X def a div 1 X scale cp np a xc 2 div 0 360 arc st gr}bind def
|
||||
/ar{cp 7 2 roll np xc 5 1 roll atan 3 1 roll atan X arc st}bind def
|
||||
/sp{yc X xc X 6 2 roll yc X xc X 6 2 roll yc X xc X 6 2 roll ct}bind def
|
||||
/V{//res neg div //y_offset add
|
||||
currentpoint pop X
|
||||
m}bind def
|
||||
/H{//res div
|
||||
0 transform X round X itransform pop
|
||||
currentpoint X pop
|
||||
moveto}bind def
|
||||
/h{//res div 0 r}bind def
|
||||
/v{//res neg div 0 X r}bind def
|
||||
/S{X H show}bind def
|
||||
/A{H //res div 1 index stringwidth pop sub 1 index length div 0 3 2 roll ashow}bind def
|
||||
/psize 10 def
|
||||
/height 0 def
|
||||
/cheight { height 0 ne { height } { psize } ifelse } bind def
|
||||
/slant 0 def
|
||||
/FF{findfont X dup 30 div 0 mm pop setlinewidth /psize X def
|
||||
[psize 0 cheight slant sin slant cos div mul cheight 0 0]
|
||||
makefont setfont}bind def
|
||||
/shade{gs
|
||||
/dy X def
|
||||
/dx X def
|
||||
np m
|
||||
0 /dy rl
|
||||
/dx 0 rl
|
||||
0 /dy neg rl
|
||||
/dx neg 0 rl
|
||||
closepath
|
||||
.9 setgray
|
||||
fill
|
||||
gr}bind def
|
||||
1 setlinecap
|
||||
|
||||
/resolution res 72 mul def
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/startFig {
|
||||
/SavedState save def
|
||||
userdict maxlength dict begin
|
||||
currentpoint transform
|
||||
|
||||
DocumentInitState setmiterlimit setgray setdash setlinejoin setlinecap
|
||||
setlinewidth setmatrix
|
||||
|
||||
itransform moveto
|
||||
|
||||
/ury exch def
|
||||
/urx exch def
|
||||
/lly exch def
|
||||
/llx exch def
|
||||
/y exch 72 mul resolution div def
|
||||
/x exch 72 mul resolution div def
|
||||
|
||||
currentpoint /cy exch def /cx exch def
|
||||
|
||||
/sx x urx llx sub div def
|
||||
/sy y ury lly sub div def
|
||||
|
||||
sx sy scale
|
||||
|
||||
cx sx div llx sub
|
||||
cy sy div ury sub translate
|
||||
|
||||
/DefFigCTM matrix currentmatrix def
|
||||
|
||||
/initmatrix {
|
||||
DefFigCTM setmatrix
|
||||
} def
|
||||
/defaultmatrix {
|
||||
DefFigCTM exch copy
|
||||
} def
|
||||
|
||||
/initgraphics {
|
||||
DocumentInitState setmiterlimit setgray setdash
|
||||
setlinejoin setlinecap setlinewidth setmatrix
|
||||
DefFigCTM setmatrix
|
||||
} def
|
||||
|
||||
/showpage {
|
||||
initgraphics
|
||||
} def
|
||||
|
||||
}bind def
|
||||
/clipFig {
|
||||
currentpoint 6 2 roll
|
||||
newpath 4 copy
|
||||
4 2 roll moveto
|
||||
6 -1 roll exch lineto
|
||||
exch lineto
|
||||
exch lineto
|
||||
closepath clip
|
||||
newpath
|
||||
moveto
|
||||
}bind def
|
||||
/doclip { llx lly urx ury clipFig } def
|
||||
/endFig {
|
||||
end SavedState restore
|
||||
}bind def
|
||||
/globalstart {
|
||||
fontnum psize slant height resolution currentpoint
|
||||
pagesave restore gsave
|
||||
}bind def
|
||||
/globalend {
|
||||
grestore moveto
|
||||
/resolution exch def /height exch def
|
||||
/slant exch def /psize exch def /fontnum exch def
|
||||
F
|
||||
/pagesave save def
|
||||
}bind def
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/fontnum 1 def
|
||||
systemdict /setpacking known { savepacking setpacking} if
|
||||
end
|
||||
/BP{
|
||||
save mark devps begin m0
|
||||
/DocumentInitState [ matrix currentmatrix currentlinewidth currentlinecap
|
||||
currentlinejoin currentdash currentgray currentmiterlimit ] cvx def
|
||||
}bind def
|
||||
/EP{
|
||||
end cleartomark restore showpage}def
|
||||
|
||||
/Encoding-1 256 array def
|
||||
0 1 255 {Encoding-1 exch /.notdef put} for
|
||||
Encoding-1 8#301 StandardEncoding 8#101 26 getinterval putinterval %A-B
|
||||
Encoding-1 8#341 StandardEncoding 8#141 26 getinterval putinterval %a-b
|
||||
Encoding-1 8#241 StandardEncoding 8#301 16 getinterval putinterval %accents
|
||||
Encoding-1 8#373 StandardEncoding 8#365 1 getinterval putinterval %dotlessi
|
||||
Encoding-1
|
||||
dup 8#41 /copyright put
|
||||
dup 8#42 /registered put
|
||||
dup 8#43 /trademark put
|
||||
dup 8#44 /logicalnot put
|
||||
dup 8#45 /Eth put
|
||||
dup 8#46 /eth put
|
||||
dup 8#47 /Thorn put
|
||||
dup 8#50 /thorn put
|
||||
dup 8#51 /brokenbar put
|
||||
dup 8#52 /degree put
|
||||
dup 8#53 /divide put
|
||||
dup 8#54 /multiply put
|
||||
dup 8#55 /minus put
|
||||
dup 8#56 /onehalf put
|
||||
dup 8#57 /onequarter put
|
||||
dup 8#60 /threequarters put
|
||||
dup 8#101 /Aacute put
|
||||
dup 8#102 /Acircumflex put
|
||||
dup 8#103 /Adieresis put
|
||||
dup 8#104 /Agrave put
|
||||
dup 8#105 /Aring put
|
||||
dup 8#106 /Atilde put
|
||||
dup 8#107 /Ccedilla put
|
||||
dup 8#110 /Eacute put
|
||||
dup 8#111 /Ecircumflex put
|
||||
dup 8#112 /Edieresis put
|
||||
dup 8#113 /Egrave put
|
||||
dup 8#114 /Iacute put
|
||||
dup 8#115 /Icircumflex put
|
||||
dup 8#116 /Idieresis put
|
||||
dup 8#117 /Igrave put
|
||||
dup 8#120 /Ntilde put
|
||||
dup 8#121 /Oacute put
|
||||
dup 8#122 /Ocircumflex put
|
||||
dup 8#123 /Odieresis put
|
||||
dup 8#124 /Ograve put
|
||||
dup 8#125 /Otilde put
|
||||
dup 8#126 /Scaron put
|
||||
dup 8#127 /Uacute put
|
||||
dup 8#130 /Ucircumflex put
|
||||
dup 8#131 /Udieresis put
|
||||
dup 8#132 /Ugrave put
|
||||
dup 8#133 /Ydieresis put
|
||||
dup 8#134 /Zcaron put
|
||||
dup 8#135 /aacute put
|
||||
dup 8#136 /acircumflex put
|
||||
dup 8#137 /adieresis put
|
||||
dup 8#140 /agrave put
|
||||
dup 8#141 /aring put
|
||||
dup 8#142 /atilde put
|
||||
dup 8#143 /ccedilla put
|
||||
dup 8#144 /eacute put
|
||||
dup 8#145 /ecircumflex put
|
||||
dup 8#146 /edieresis put
|
||||
dup 8#147 /egrave put
|
||||
dup 8#150 /iacute put
|
||||
dup 8#151 /icircumflex put
|
||||
dup 8#152 /idieresis put
|
||||
dup 8#153 /igrave put
|
||||
dup 8#154 /ntilde put
|
||||
dup 8#155 /oacute put
|
||||
dup 8#156 /ocircumflex put
|
||||
dup 8#157 /odieresis put
|
||||
dup 8#160 /ograve put
|
||||
dup 8#161 /otilde put
|
||||
dup 8#162 /scaron put
|
||||
dup 8#163 /uacute put
|
||||
dup 8#164 /ucircumflex put
|
||||
dup 8#165 /udieresis put
|
||||
dup 8#166 /ugrave put
|
||||
dup 8#167 /ydieresis put
|
||||
dup 8#170 /zcaron put
|
||||
pop
|
||||
|
||||
/Enc-dict 30 dict def
|
||||
Enc-dict /tmpstr1 50 string put
|
||||
Enc-dict /tmpstr2 50 string put
|
||||
Enc-dict /tmpstr3 50 string dup (Encoding-) exch cvs pop put
|
||||
/AEnc-def { % arguments: the original font's name, encoding nr
|
||||
Enc-dict begin
|
||||
tmpstr2 cvs /Enc-no exch def % Remember the number in a string
|
||||
dup /OrigName exch def % remember the name
|
||||
findfont dup maxlength dict /newdict exch def % get dictionary for new font
|
||||
{ exch dup /FID ne
|
||||
{ exch newdict 3 1 roll put }
|
||||
{ pop pop } % Ignore FID
|
||||
ifelse
|
||||
} forall
|
||||
newdict begin
|
||||
/Encoding
|
||||
tmpstr3 9 Enc-no putinterval tmpstr3 0 9 Enc-no length add getinterval
|
||||
cvn load
|
||||
def % Replace encoding
|
||||
currentdict /UniqueID known
|
||||
{ /UniqueID UniqueID Enc-no cvi 49999 mul add def } if % Derive New UniqueID
|
||||
end % newdict
|
||||
/FNlength OrigName tmpstr1 cvs length def % convert name, remember length
|
||||
FNlength 1 add Enc-no length add string
|
||||
dup 0 OrigName tmpstr1 cvs putinterval
|
||||
dup FNlength (-) putinterval
|
||||
dup FNlength 1 add Enc-no putinterval
|
||||
dup 0 tmpstr1 0 FNlength getinterval putinterval % Add old name
|
||||
cvn dup newdict /FontName 3 2 roll put newdict definefont
|
||||
end % Enc-dict
|
||||
} def
|
||||
/Times-Roman 1 AEnc-def pop
|
||||
/R-1{/Times-Roman-1 FF}def
|
||||
/R{/Times-Roman FF}def
|
||||
/B{/Times-Bold FF}def
|
||||
%%EndProlog
|
||||
%%Page: 1 1
|
||||
BP
|
||||
/slant 0 def
|
||||
/height 0 def
|
||||
480 V
|
||||
10 R
|
||||
(ADVENT)416 720 A
|
||||
1144(\()S
|
||||
1186(6)S
|
||||
1244(\))S
|
||||
2696(Eighth)S
|
||||
(Edition)296 2989 A
|
||||
(ADVENT)416 4703 A
|
||||
5127(\()S
|
||||
5169(6)S
|
||||
5227(\))S
|
||||
960 V
|
||||
9 R
|
||||
720(N)S
|
||||
722(NA)S
|
||||
790(AM)S
|
||||
858(ME)S
|
||||
940(E)S
|
||||
1080 V
|
||||
10 R
|
||||
1080(advent,)S
|
||||
1398(adventure)S
|
||||
10 R-1
|
||||
1820(-)S
|
||||
10 R
|
||||
1902(an)S
|
||||
2022(exploration)S
|
||||
2505(game)S
|
||||
1248 V
|
||||
9 R
|
||||
720(S)S
|
||||
722(SY)S
|
||||
774(YN)S
|
||||
842(NO)S
|
||||
910(OP)S
|
||||
978(PS)S
|
||||
1030(SI)S
|
||||
1082(IS)S
|
||||
1115(S)S
|
||||
1368 V
|
||||
10 B
|
||||
1080(advent)S
|
||||
1536 V
|
||||
9 R
|
||||
720(D)S
|
||||
722(DE)S
|
||||
790(ES)S
|
||||
848(SC)S
|
||||
900(CR)S
|
||||
962(RI)S
|
||||
1024(IP)S
|
||||
1057(PT)S
|
||||
1109(TI)S
|
||||
1167(IO)S
|
||||
1200(ON)S
|
||||
1268(N)S
|
||||
1656 V
|
||||
10 R
|
||||
1080(The)S
|
||||
1275(object)S
|
||||
1559(of)S
|
||||
1681(the)S
|
||||
1842(game)S
|
||||
2099(is)S
|
||||
2205(to)S
|
||||
2322(locate)S
|
||||
2602(and)S
|
||||
2786(explore)S
|
||||
3127(Colossal)S
|
||||
3512(Cave,)S
|
||||
3783(\256nd)S
|
||||
3978(the)S
|
||||
4140(treasures)S
|
||||
4538(hidden)S
|
||||
4850(there,)S
|
||||
5116(and)S
|
||||
1776 V
|
||||
1080(bring)S
|
||||
1328(them)S
|
||||
1564(back)S
|
||||
1789(to)S
|
||||
1902(the)S
|
||||
2060(building)S
|
||||
2429(with)S
|
||||
(you.)175 2643 A
|
||||
2878(The)S
|
||||
3070(program)S
|
||||
3446(is)S
|
||||
3548(self-descriptive)S
|
||||
4205(to)S
|
||||
4318(a)S
|
||||
4398(point,)S
|
||||
4664(but)S
|
||||
4827(part)S
|
||||
5019(of)S
|
||||
5138(the)S
|
||||
1896 V
|
||||
1080(game)S
|
||||
1323(is)S
|
||||
1415(to)S
|
||||
1518(discover)S
|
||||
1884(its)S
|
||||
2004(rules.)S
|
||||
2064 V
|
||||
1080(To)S
|
||||
1225(terminate)S
|
||||
1639(a)S
|
||||
1717(game,)S
|
||||
1993(type)S
|
||||
2200(`quit';)S
|
||||
2486(to)S
|
||||
2598(save)S
|
||||
2811(a)S
|
||||
2890(game)S
|
||||
3142(for)S
|
||||
3294(later)S
|
||||
3508(resumption,)S
|
||||
4019(type)S
|
||||
4226(`save')S
|
||||
4507(now,)S
|
||||
4739(and)S
|
||||
4918(`restore')S
|
||||
2184 V
|
||||
1080(when)S
|
||||
(you)150 1323 A
|
||||
1498(resume.)S
|
||||
2352 V
|
||||
9 R
|
||||
720(F)S
|
||||
722(FI)S
|
||||
774(IL)S
|
||||
807(LE)S
|
||||
865(ES)S
|
||||
923(S)S
|
||||
2472 V
|
||||
10 B
|
||||
1080(advent.sav)S
|
||||
10 R
|
||||
1830(A)S
|
||||
1928(saved)S
|
||||
2182(adventure)S
|
||||
2604(game.)S
|
||||
7903 V
|
||||
720(Page)S
|
||||
941(1)S
|
||||
2694(\()S
|
||||
2736(May)S
|
||||
2945(6,)S
|
||||
(1986)200 3045 A
|
||||
3253(\))S
|
||||
4455(September)S
|
||||
4911(17,)S
|
||||
(1996)200 5061 A
|
||||
8143 V
|
||||
EP
|
||||
%%Trailer
|
||||
%%DocumentFonts: Times-Roman Times-Bold
|
||||
%%Pages: 1
|
||||
3966
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN7.PS
Normal file
3966
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN7.PS
Normal file
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
30879
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN8.PS
Normal file
30879
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/ALLPS/ALLMAN8.PS
Normal file
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
767
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ACD.1
Normal file
767
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ACD.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,767 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
acd - a compiler driver
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
acd -v[n] -vn[n] -name name -descr descr -T dir [arg ...]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Acd is a compiler driver, a program that calls the several passes that
|
||||
are needed to compile a source file. It keeps track of all the temporary
|
||||
files used between the passes. It also defines the interface of the
|
||||
compiler, the options the user gets to see.
|
||||
|
||||
This text only describes acd itself, it says nothing about the different
|
||||
options the C-compiler accepts. (It has nothing to do with any language,
|
||||
other than being a tool to give a compiler a user interface.)
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
Acd itself takes five options:
|
||||
|
||||
-v[n]
|
||||
Sets the diagnostic level to n (by default 2). The higher n is, the
|
||||
more output acd generates: -v0 does not produce any output. -v1
|
||||
prints the basenames of the programs called. -v2 prints names and
|
||||
arguments of the programs called. -v3 shows the commands executed
|
||||
from the description file too. -v4 shows the program read from the
|
||||
description file too. Levels 3 and 4 use backspace overstrikes that
|
||||
look good when viewing the output with a smart pager.
|
||||
|
||||
-vn[n]
|
||||
Like -v except that no command is executed. The driver is just
|
||||
play-acting.
|
||||
|
||||
-name name
|
||||
Acd is normally linked to the name the compiler is to be called with
|
||||
by the user. The basename of this, say cc, is the call name of the
|
||||
driver. It plays a role in selecting the proper description file.
|
||||
With the -name option one can change this. Acd -name cc has the
|
||||
same effect as calling the program as cc.
|
||||
|
||||
-descr descr
|
||||
Allows one to choose the pass description file of the driver. By
|
||||
default descr is the same as name, the call name of the program. If
|
||||
descr doesn't start with /, ./, or ../ then the file
|
||||
/usr/lib/descr/descr will be used for the description, otherwise
|
||||
descr itself. Thus cc -descr newcc calls the C-compiler with a
|
||||
different description file without changing the call name. Finally,
|
||||
if descr is "-", standard input is read. (The default lib directory
|
||||
/usr/lib, may be changed to dir at compile time by -DLIB=\"dir\".
|
||||
The default descr may be set with -DDESCR=\"descr\" for simple
|
||||
installations on a system without symlinks.)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
-T dir
|
||||
Temporary files are made in /tmp by default, which may be overridden
|
||||
by the environment variable TMPDIR, which may be overridden by the
|
||||
-T option.
|
||||
|
||||
THE DESCRIPTION FILE
|
||||
The description file is a program interpreted by the driver. It has
|
||||
variables, lists of files, argument parsing commands, and rules for
|
||||
transforming input files.
|
||||
|
||||
Syntax
|
||||
There are four simple objects:
|
||||
|
||||
Words, Substitutions, Letters, and Operators.
|
||||
|
||||
And there are two ways to group objects:
|
||||
|
||||
Lists, forming sequences of anything but letters,
|
||||
|
||||
Strings, forming sequences of anything but Words and Operators.
|
||||
|
||||
Each object has the following syntax:
|
||||
|
||||
Words
|
||||
They are sequences of characters, like cc, -I/usr/include, /lib/cpp.
|
||||
No whitespace and no special characters. The backslash character
|
||||
(\) may be used to make special characters common, except
|
||||
whitespace. A backslash followed by whitespace is completely
|
||||
removed from the input. The sequence \n is changed to a newline.
|
||||
|
||||
Substitutions
|
||||
A substitution (henceforth called 'subst') is formed with a $, e.g.
|
||||
$opt, $PATH, ${lib}, $*. The variable name after the $ is made of
|
||||
letters, digits and underscores, or any sequence of characters
|
||||
between parentheses or braces, or a single other character. A subst
|
||||
indicates that the value of the named variable must be substituted
|
||||
in the list or string when fully evaluated.
|
||||
|
||||
Letters
|
||||
Letters are the single characters that would make up a word.
|
||||
|
||||
Operators
|
||||
The characters =, +, -, *, <, and > are the operators. The first
|
||||
four must be surrounded by whitespace if they are to be seen as
|
||||
special (they are often used in arguments). The last two are always
|
||||
special.
|
||||
|
||||
Lists
|
||||
One line of objects in the description file forms a list. Put
|
||||
parentheses around it and you have a sublist. The values of
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
variables are lists.
|
||||
|
||||
Strings
|
||||
Anything that is not yet a word is a string. All it needs is that
|
||||
the substs in it are evaluated, e.g. $LIBPATH/lib$key.a. A single
|
||||
subst doesn't make a string, it expands to a list. You need at
|
||||
least one letter or other subst next to it. Strings (and words) may
|
||||
also be formed by enclosing them in double quotes. Only \ and $
|
||||
keep their special meaning within quotes.
|
||||
|
||||
Evaluation
|
||||
One thing has to be carefully understood: Substitutions are delayed until
|
||||
the last possible moment, and description files make heavy use of this.
|
||||
Only if a subst is tainted, either because its variable is declared
|
||||
local, or because a subst in its variable's value is tainted, is it
|
||||
immediately substituted. So if a list is assigned to a variable then
|
||||
this list is only checked for tainted substs. Those substs are replaced
|
||||
by the value of their variable. This is called partial evaluation.
|
||||
|
||||
Full evaluation expands all substs, the list is flattened, i.e. all
|
||||
parentheses are removed from sublists.
|
||||
|
||||
Implosive evaluation is the last that has to be done to a list before it
|
||||
can be used as a command to execute. The substs within a string have
|
||||
been evaluated to lists after full expansion, but a string must be turned
|
||||
into a single word, not a list. To make this happen, a string is first
|
||||
exploded to all possible combinations of words choosing one member of the
|
||||
lists within the string. These words are tried one by one to see if they
|
||||
exist as a file. The first one that exists is taken, if none exists than
|
||||
the first choice is used. As an example, assume LIBPATH equals (/lib
|
||||
/usr/lib), key is (c) and key happens to be local. Then we have:
|
||||
|
||||
"$LIBPATH/lib$key.a"
|
||||
|
||||
before evaluation,
|
||||
|
||||
"$LIBPATH/lib(c).a"
|
||||
|
||||
after partial evaluation,
|
||||
|
||||
"(/lib/libc.a /usr/lib/libc.a)"
|
||||
|
||||
after full evaluation, and finally
|
||||
|
||||
/usr/lib/libc.a
|
||||
|
||||
after implosion, if the file exists.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Operators
|
||||
The operators modify the way evaluation is done and perform a special
|
||||
function on a list:
|
||||
|
||||
* Forces full evaluation on all the list elements following it. Use
|
||||
it to force substitution of the current value of a variable. This
|
||||
is the only operator that forces immediate evaluation.
|
||||
|
||||
+ When a + exists in a list that is fully evaluated, then all the
|
||||
elements before the + are imploded and all elements after the + are
|
||||
imploded and added to the list if they are not already in the list.
|
||||
So this operator can be used either for set addition, or to force
|
||||
implosive expansion within a sublist.
|
||||
|
||||
- Like +, except that elements after the - are removed from the list.
|
||||
|
||||
The set operators can be used to gather options that exclude each other
|
||||
or for their side effect of implosive expansion. You may want to write:
|
||||
|
||||
cpp -I$LIBPATH/include
|
||||
|
||||
to call cpp with an extra include directory, but $LIBPATH is expanded
|
||||
using a filename starting with -I so this won't work. Given that any
|
||||
problem in Computer Science can be solved with an extra level of
|
||||
indirection, use this instead:
|
||||
|
||||
cpp -I$INCLUDE
|
||||
INCLUDE = $LIBPATH/include +
|
||||
|
||||
Special Variables
|
||||
There are three special variables used in a description file: $*, $<,
|
||||
and $>. These variables are always local and mostly read-only. They
|
||||
will be explained later.
|
||||
|
||||
A Program
|
||||
The lists in a description file form a program that is executed from the
|
||||
first to the last list. The first word in a list may be recognized as a
|
||||
builtin command (only if the first list element is indeed simply a word.)
|
||||
If it is not a builtin command then the list is imploded and used as a
|
||||
UNIX command with arguments.
|
||||
|
||||
Indentation (by tabs or spaces) is not just makeup for a program, but are
|
||||
used to group lines together. Some builtin commands need a body. These
|
||||
bodies are simply lines at a deeper indentation.
|
||||
|
||||
Empty lines are not ignored either, they have the same indentation level
|
||||
as the line before it. Comments (starting with a # and ending at end of
|
||||
line) have an indentation of their own and can be used as null commands.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
4
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Acd will complain about unexpected indentation shifts and empty bodies.
|
||||
Commands can share the same body by placing them at the same indentation
|
||||
level before the indented body. They are then "guards" to the same body,
|
||||
and are tried one by one until one succeeds, after which the body is
|
||||
executed.
|
||||
|
||||
Semicolons may be used to separate commands instead of newlines. The
|
||||
commands are then all at the indentation level of the first.
|
||||
|
||||
Execution phases
|
||||
The driver runs in three phases: Initialization, Argument scanning, and
|
||||
Compilation. Not all commands work in all phases. This is further
|
||||
explained below.
|
||||
|
||||
The Commands
|
||||
The commands accept arguments that are usually generic expressions that
|
||||
implode to a word or a list of words. When var is specified, then a
|
||||
single word or subst needs to be given, so an assignment can be either
|
||||
name = value, or $name = value.
|
||||
|
||||
var = expr ...
|
||||
The partially evaluated list of expressions is assigned to var.
|
||||
During the evaluation is var marked as local, and after the
|
||||
assignment set from undefined to defined.
|
||||
|
||||
unset var
|
||||
Var is set to null and is marked as undefined.
|
||||
|
||||
import var
|
||||
If var is defined in the environment of acd then it is assigned to
|
||||
var. The environment variable is split into words at whitespace and
|
||||
colons. Empty space between two colons (::) is changed to a dot.
|
||||
|
||||
mktemp var [suffix]
|
||||
Assigns to var the name of a new temporary file, usually something
|
||||
like /tmp/acd12345x. If suffix is present then it will be added to
|
||||
the temporary file's name. (Use it because some programs require
|
||||
it, or just because it looks good.) Acd remembers this file, and
|
||||
will delete it as soon as you stop referencing it.
|
||||
|
||||
temporary word
|
||||
Mark the file named by word as a temporary file. You have to make
|
||||
sure that the name is stored in some list in imploded form, and not
|
||||
just temporarily created when word is evaluated, because then it
|
||||
will be immediately removed and forgotten.
|
||||
|
||||
stop suffix
|
||||
Sets the target suffix for the compilation phase. Something like
|
||||
stop .o means that the source files must be compiled to object
|
||||
files. At least one stop command must be executed before the
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
5
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
compilation phase begins. It may not be changed during the
|
||||
compilation phase. (Note: There is no restriction on suffix, it
|
||||
need not start with a dot.)
|
||||
|
||||
treat file suffix
|
||||
Marks the file as having the given suffix for the compile phase.
|
||||
Useful for sending a -l option directly to the loader by treating it
|
||||
as having the .a suffix.
|
||||
|
||||
numeric arg
|
||||
Checks if arg is a number. If not then acd will exit with a nice
|
||||
error message.
|
||||
|
||||
error expr ...
|
||||
Makes the driver print the error message expr ... and exit.
|
||||
|
||||
if expr = expr
|
||||
If tests if the two expressions are equal using set comparison, i.e.
|
||||
each expression should contain all the words in the other
|
||||
expression. If the test succeeds then the if-body is executed.
|
||||
|
||||
ifdef var
|
||||
Executes the ifdef-body if var is defined.
|
||||
|
||||
ifndef var
|
||||
Executes the ifndef-body if var is undefined.
|
||||
|
||||
iftemp arg
|
||||
Executes the iftemp-body if arg is a temporary file. Use it when a
|
||||
command has the same file as input and output and you don't want to
|
||||
clobber the source file:
|
||||
|
||||
transform .o .o
|
||||
iftemp $*
|
||||
$> = $*
|
||||
else
|
||||
cp $* $>
|
||||
optimize $>
|
||||
|
||||
ifhash arg
|
||||
Executes the ifhash-body if arg is an existing file with a '#' as
|
||||
the very first character. This usually indicates that the file must
|
||||
be pre-processed:
|
||||
|
||||
transform .s .o
|
||||
ifhash $*
|
||||
mktemp ASM .s
|
||||
$CPP $* > $ASM
|
||||
else
|
||||
ASM = $*
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
6
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
$AS -o $> $ASM
|
||||
unset ASM
|
||||
|
||||
else Executes the else-body if the last executed if, ifdef, ifndef,
|
||||
iftemp, or ifhash was unsuccessful. Note that else need not
|
||||
immediately follow an if, but you are advised not to make use of
|
||||
this. It is a "feature" that may not last.
|
||||
|
||||
apply suffix1 suffix2
|
||||
Executed inside a transform rule body to transform the input file
|
||||
according to another transform rule that has the given input and
|
||||
output suffixes. The file under $* will be replaced by the new
|
||||
file. So if there is a .c .i preprocessor rule then the example of
|
||||
ifhash can be replaced by:
|
||||
|
||||
transform .s .o
|
||||
ifhash $*
|
||||
apply .c .i
|
||||
$AS -o $> $*
|
||||
|
||||
include descr
|
||||
Reads another description file and replaces the include with it.
|
||||
Execution continues with the first list in the new program. The
|
||||
search for descr is the same as used for the -descr option. Use
|
||||
include to switch in different front ends or back ends, or to call a
|
||||
shared description file with a different initialization. Note that
|
||||
descr is only evaluated the first time the include is called. After
|
||||
that the include has been replaced with the included program, so
|
||||
changing its argument won't get you a different file.
|
||||
|
||||
arg string ...
|
||||
Arg may be executed in the initialization and scanning phase to post
|
||||
an argument scanning rule, that's all the command itself does. Like
|
||||
an if that fails it allows more guards to share the same body.
|
||||
|
||||
transform suffix1 suffix2
|
||||
Transform, like arg, only posts a rule to transform a file with the
|
||||
suffix suffix1 into a file with the suffix suffix2.
|
||||
|
||||
prefer suffix1 suffix2
|
||||
Tells that the transformation rule from suffix1 to suffix2 is to be
|
||||
preferred when looking for a transformation path to the stop suffix.
|
||||
Normally the shortest route to the stop suffix is used. Prefer is
|
||||
ignored on a combine, because the special nature of combines does
|
||||
not allow ambiguity.
|
||||
|
||||
The two suffixes on a transform or prefer may be the same, giving a
|
||||
rule that is only executed when preferred.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
combine suffix-list suffix
|
||||
Combine is like transform except that it allows a list of input
|
||||
suffixes to match several types of input files that must be combined
|
||||
into one.
|
||||
|
||||
scan The scanning phase may be run early from the initialization phase
|
||||
with the scan command. Use it if you need to make choices based on
|
||||
the arguments before posting the transformation rules. After
|
||||
running this, scan and arg become no-ops.
|
||||
|
||||
compile
|
||||
Move on to the compilation phase early, so that you have a chance to
|
||||
run a few extra commands before exiting. This command implies a
|
||||
scan.
|
||||
|
||||
Any other command is seen as a UNIX command. This is where the < and >
|
||||
operators come into play. They redirect standard input and standard
|
||||
output to the file mentioned after them, just like the shell. Acd will
|
||||
stop with an error if the command is not successful.
|
||||
|
||||
The Initialization Phase
|
||||
The driver starts by executing the program once from top to bottom to
|
||||
initialize variables and post argument scanning and transformation rules.
|
||||
|
||||
The Scanning Phase
|
||||
In this phase the driver makes a pass over the command line arguments to
|
||||
process options. Each arg rule is tried one by one in the order they
|
||||
were posted against the front of the argument list. If a match is made
|
||||
then the matched arguments are removed from the argument list and the
|
||||
arg-body is executed. If no match can be made then the first argument is
|
||||
moved to the list of files waiting to be transformed and the scan is
|
||||
restarted.
|
||||
|
||||
The match is done as follows: Each of the strings after arg must match
|
||||
one argument at the front of the argument list. A character in a string
|
||||
must match a character in an argument word, a subst in a string may match
|
||||
1 to all remaining characters in the argument, preferring the shortest
|
||||
possible match. The hyphen in a argument starting with a hyphen cannot
|
||||
be matched by a subst. Therefore:
|
||||
|
||||
arg -i
|
||||
|
||||
matches only the argument -i.
|
||||
|
||||
arg -O$n
|
||||
|
||||
matches any argument that starts with -O and is at least three characters
|
||||
long. Lastly,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
8
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
arg -o $out
|
||||
|
||||
matches -o and the argument following it, unless that argument starts
|
||||
with a hyphen.
|
||||
|
||||
The variable $* is set to all the matched arguments before the arg-body
|
||||
is executed. All the substs in the arg strings are set to the characters
|
||||
they match. The variable $> is set to null. All the values of the
|
||||
variables are saved and the variables marked local. All variables except
|
||||
$> are marked read-only. After the arg-body is executed is the value of
|
||||
$> concatenated to the file list. This allows one to stuff new files
|
||||
into the transformation phase. These added names are not evaluated until
|
||||
the start of the next phase.
|
||||
|
||||
The Compilation Phase
|
||||
The files gathered in the file list in the scanning phase are now
|
||||
transformed one by one using the transformation rules. The shortest, or
|
||||
preferred route is computed for each file all the way to the stop suffix.
|
||||
Each file is transformed until it lands at the stop suffix, or at a
|
||||
combine rule. After a while all files are either fully transformed or at
|
||||
a combine rule.
|
||||
|
||||
The driver chooses a combine rule that is not on a path from another
|
||||
combine rule and executes it. The file that results is then transformed
|
||||
until it again lands at a combine rule or the stop suffix. This
|
||||
continues until all files are at the stop suffix and the program exits.
|
||||
|
||||
The paths through transform rules may be ambiguous and have cycles, they
|
||||
will be resolved. But paths through combines must be unambiguous,
|
||||
because of the many paths from the different files that meet there. A
|
||||
description file will usually have only one combine rule for the loader.
|
||||
However if you do have a combine conflict then put a no-op transform rule
|
||||
in front of one to resolve the problem.
|
||||
|
||||
If a file matches a long and a short suffix then the long suffix is
|
||||
preferred. By putting a null input suffix ("") in a rule one can match
|
||||
any file that no other rule matches. You can send unknown files to the
|
||||
loader this way.
|
||||
|
||||
The variable $* is set to the file to be transformed or the files to be
|
||||
combined before the transform or combine-body is executed. $> is set to
|
||||
the output file name, it may again be modified. $< is set to the
|
||||
original name of the first file of $* with the leading directories and
|
||||
the suffix removed. $* will be made up of temporary files after the
|
||||
first rule. $> will be another temporary file or the name of the target
|
||||
file ($< plus the stop suffix), if the stop suffix is reached.
|
||||
|
||||
$> is passed to the next rule; it is imploded and checked to be a single
|
||||
word. This driver does not store intermediate object files in the
|
||||
current directory like most other compilers, but keeps them in /tmp too.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
9
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
(Who knows if the current directory can have files created in?) As an
|
||||
example, here is how you can express the "normal" method:
|
||||
|
||||
transform .s .o
|
||||
if $> = $<.o
|
||||
# Stop suffix is .o
|
||||
else
|
||||
$> = $<.o
|
||||
temporary $>
|
||||
$AS -o $> $*
|
||||
|
||||
Note that temporary is not called if the target is already the object
|
||||
file, or you would lose the intended result! $> is known to be a word,
|
||||
because $< is local. (Any string whose substs are all expanded changes
|
||||
to a word.)
|
||||
|
||||
Predefined Variables
|
||||
The driver has three variables predefined: PROGRAM, set to the call name
|
||||
of the driver, VERSION, the driver's version number, and ARCH, set to the
|
||||
name of the default output architecture. The latter is optional, and
|
||||
only defined if acd was compiled with -DARCH=\"arch-name\".
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLE
|
||||
As an example a description file for a C compiler is given. It has a
|
||||
front end (ccom), an intermediate code optimizer (opt), a code generator
|
||||
(cg), an assembler (as), and a loader (ld). The compiler can pre-
|
||||
process, but there is also a separate cpp. If the -D and options like it
|
||||
are changed to look like -o then this example is even as required by
|
||||
POSIX.
|
||||
|
||||
# The compiler support search path.
|
||||
C = /lib /usr/lib /usr/local/lib
|
||||
|
||||
# Compiler passes.
|
||||
CPP = $C/cpp $CPP_F
|
||||
CCOM = $C/ccom $CPP_F
|
||||
OPT = $C/opt
|
||||
CG = $C/cg
|
||||
AS = $C/as
|
||||
LD = $C/ld
|
||||
|
||||
# Predefined symbols.
|
||||
CPP_F = -D__EXAMPLE_CC__
|
||||
|
||||
# Library path.
|
||||
LIBPATH = $USERLIBPATH $C
|
||||
|
||||
# Default transformation target.
|
||||
stop .out
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
10
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
# Preprocessor directives.
|
||||
arg -D$name
|
||||
arg -U$name
|
||||
arg -I$dir
|
||||
CPP_F = $CPP_F $*
|
||||
|
||||
# Stop suffix.
|
||||
arg -c
|
||||
stop .o
|
||||
|
||||
arg -E
|
||||
stop .E
|
||||
|
||||
# Optimization.
|
||||
arg -O
|
||||
prefer .m .m
|
||||
OPT = $OPT -O1
|
||||
|
||||
arg -O$n
|
||||
numeric $n
|
||||
prefer .m .m
|
||||
OPT = $OPT $*
|
||||
|
||||
# Add debug info to the executable.
|
||||
arg -g
|
||||
CCOM = $CCOM -g
|
||||
|
||||
# Add directories to the library path.
|
||||
arg -L$dir
|
||||
USERLIBPATH = $USERLIBPATH $dir
|
||||
|
||||
# -llib must be searched in $LIBPATH later.
|
||||
arg -l$lib
|
||||
$> = $LIBPATH/lib$lib.a
|
||||
|
||||
# Change output file.
|
||||
arg -o$out
|
||||
arg -o $out
|
||||
OUT = $out
|
||||
|
||||
# Complain about a missing argument.
|
||||
arg -o
|
||||
error "argument expected after '$*'"
|
||||
|
||||
# Any other option (like -s) are for the loader.
|
||||
arg -$any
|
||||
LD = $LD $*
|
||||
|
||||
# Preprocess C-source.
|
||||
transform .c .i
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
11
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
$CPP $* > $>
|
||||
|
||||
# Preprocess C-source and send it to standard output or $OUT.
|
||||
transform .c .E
|
||||
ifndef OUT
|
||||
$CPP $*
|
||||
else
|
||||
$CPP $* > $OUT
|
||||
|
||||
# Compile C-source to intermediate code.
|
||||
transform .c .m
|
||||
transform .i .m
|
||||
$CCOM $* $>
|
||||
|
||||
# Intermediate code optimizer.
|
||||
transform .m .m
|
||||
$OPT $* > $>
|
||||
|
||||
# Intermediate to assembly.
|
||||
transform .m .s
|
||||
$CG $* > $>
|
||||
|
||||
# Assembler to object code.
|
||||
transform .s .o
|
||||
if $> = $<.o
|
||||
ifdef OUT
|
||||
$> = $OUT
|
||||
$AS -o $> $*
|
||||
|
||||
# Combine object files and libraries to an executable.
|
||||
combine (.o .a) .out
|
||||
ifndef OUT
|
||||
OUT = a.out
|
||||
$LD -o $OUT $C/crtso.o $* $C/libc.a
|
||||
|
||||
FILES
|
||||
|
||||
/usr/lib/descr/descr - compiler driver description file.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cc(1).
|
||||
|
||||
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
|
||||
Even though the end result doesn't look much like it, many ideas were
|
||||
nevertheless derived from the ACK compiler driver by Ed Keizer.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
12
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ACD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ACD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
POSIX requires that if compiling one source file to an object file fails
|
||||
then the compiler should continue with the next source file. There is no
|
||||
way acd can do this, it always stops after error. It doesn't even know
|
||||
what an object file is! (The requirement is stupid anyhow.)
|
||||
|
||||
If you don't think that tabs are 8 spaces wide, then don't mix them with
|
||||
spaces for indentation.
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
13
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ANM.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ANM.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ANM(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ANM(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
anm - print name list
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
anm [-gnoprus] file ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-g Global symbols only
|
||||
|
||||
-n Sort numerically
|
||||
|
||||
-o Prepend the filename to each line
|
||||
|
||||
-p No sorting----use symbol table order
|
||||
|
||||
-r Sort in reverse order
|
||||
|
||||
-u List undefined symbols only
|
||||
|
||||
-s Sort in section order
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
anm -gn test.o # Print global symbols in numerical order
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Anm prints the name list (symbol table) of each ACK format object file in
|
||||
the argument list. If no file name is given, a.out is used. Each symbol
|
||||
name is preceded by its value, a section indicator and a type indicator.
|
||||
The section indicators are:
|
||||
|
||||
U Undefined symbol
|
||||
A Absolute symbol
|
||||
- Other symbol
|
||||
|
||||
The type indicators are:
|
||||
|
||||
F Filename
|
||||
M Module name
|
||||
S Section name
|
||||
E External (global) symbol
|
||||
- Local symbol
|
||||
|
||||
The output is sorted alphabetically, unless otherwise specified. Notice
|
||||
that anm can only be used on ACK format object files (that is: .o and
|
||||
.out files). If you want to get the name list of an executable program
|
||||
use nm instead.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ANM(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ANM(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
asize(1), nm(1), ar(1), size(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/AR.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/AR.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AR(1) Minix Programmer's Manual AR(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
ar, aal - archivers
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
ar [dmpqrtx][abciluv] [posname] archive [file ...]
|
||||
aal [dpqrtx][clv] archive [file ...]
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
ar r libc.a sort.s # Replace sort.s in libc.a
|
||||
|
||||
ar rb a.s libc.a b.s
|
||||
# Insert b.s before a.s in libc.a
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Ar allows groups of files to be put together into a single archive. It
|
||||
is normally used for libraries of compiled procedures. Aal is like ar,
|
||||
but is to be used with the ACK compiler. The following keys are allowed:
|
||||
|
||||
d: Delete. Ar will delete the named members.
|
||||
m: Move named files. Ar expects a, b, or i to be specified.
|
||||
p: Print the named files (list them on stdout)
|
||||
q: Quickly append to the end of the archive file.
|
||||
r: Replace (append when not in archive).
|
||||
t: Print the archive's table of contents.
|
||||
x: Extract
|
||||
|
||||
The keys may optionally concatencated with one or more of the following:
|
||||
|
||||
a: After posname
|
||||
b: Before posname
|
||||
c: Create (suppresses creation message)
|
||||
i: Before posname
|
||||
l: Local temporary file for work instead of /tmp/ar.$$$$$
|
||||
u: Replace only if dated later than member in archive
|
||||
v: Verbose
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
anm(1), asize(1), nm(1), size(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ASCII.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ASCII.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ASCII(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ASCII(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
ascii - strip all the pure ASCII lines from a file
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
ascii [-n] [file]
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-n Extract the lines containing nonASCII characters
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
ascii file >outf # Write all the ASCII lines on outf
|
||||
|
||||
ascii -n <file >outf
|
||||
# Write all the nonASCII lines on outf
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Sometimes a file contains some nonASCII characters that are in the way.
|
||||
This program allows the lines containing only ASCII characters to be
|
||||
grepped from the file. With the -n flag, the nonASCII lines are grepped.
|
||||
No matter whether the flag is used or not, the program returns an exit
|
||||
status of true if the file is pure ASCII, and false otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
tr(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
944
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ASH.1
Normal file
944
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ASH.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,944 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
ash, command, getopts, hash, jobs, local, return, setvar, unset - a shell
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
ash [ -efIijnsxz ] [ +efIijnsxz ] [ -c command ] [ arg ] ...
|
||||
|
||||
COPYRIGHT
|
||||
Copyright 1989 by Kenneth Almquist.
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Ash is a version of sh with features similar to those of the System V
|
||||
shell. This manual page lists all the features of ash but concentrates
|
||||
on the ones not in other shells.
|
||||
|
||||
Invocation
|
||||
|
||||
If the -c options is given, then the shell executes the specified shell
|
||||
command. The -s flag cause the shell to read commands from the standard
|
||||
input (after executing any command specified with the -c option. If
|
||||
neither the -s or -c options are set, then the first arg is taken as the
|
||||
name of a file to read commands from. If this is impossible because
|
||||
there are no arguments following the options, then ash will set the -s
|
||||
flag and will read commands from the standard input.
|
||||
|
||||
The shell sets the initial value of the positional parameters from the
|
||||
args remaining after any arg used as the name of a file of commands is
|
||||
deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
The flags (other than -c) are set by preceding them with ``-'' and
|
||||
cleared by preceding them with ``+''; see the set builtin command for a
|
||||
list of flags. If no value is specified for the -i flag, the -s flag is
|
||||
set, and the standard input and output of the shell are connected to
|
||||
terminals, then the -i flag will be set. If no value is specified for
|
||||
the -j flag, then the -j flag will be set if the -i flag is set.
|
||||
|
||||
When the shell is invoked with the -c option, it is good practice to
|
||||
include the -i flag if the command was entered interactively by a user.
|
||||
For compatibility with the System V shell, the -i option should come
|
||||
after the -c option.
|
||||
|
||||
If the first character of argument zero to the shell is ``-'', the shell
|
||||
is assumed to be a login shell, and the files /etc/profile and .profile
|
||||
are read if they exist. If the environment variable SHINIT is set on
|
||||
entry to the shell, the commands in SHINIT are normally parsed and
|
||||
executed. SHINIT is not examined if the shell is a login shell, or if it
|
||||
the shell is running a shell procedure. (A shell is considered to be
|
||||
running a shell procedure if neither the -s nor the -c options are set.)
|
||||
|
||||
Control Structures
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A list is a sequence of zero or more commands separated by newlines,
|
||||
semicolons, or ampersands, and optionally terminated by one of these
|
||||
three characters. (This differs from the System V shell, which requires
|
||||
a list to contain at least one command in most cases.) The commands in a
|
||||
list are executed in the order they are written. If command is followed
|
||||
by an ampersand, the shell starts the command and immediately proceed
|
||||
onto the next command; otherwise it waits for the command to terminate
|
||||
before proceeding to the next one.
|
||||
|
||||
``&&'' and ``||'' are binary operators. ``&&'' executes the first
|
||||
command, and then executes the second command iff the exit status of the
|
||||
first command is zero. ``||'' is similar, but executes the second
|
||||
command iff the exit status of the first command is nonzero. ``&&'' and
|
||||
``||'' both have the same priority.
|
||||
|
||||
The ``|'' operator is a binary operator which feeds the standard output
|
||||
of the first command into the standard input of the second command. The
|
||||
exit status of the ``|'' operator is the exit status of the second
|
||||
command. ``|'' has a higher priority than ``||'' or ``&&''.
|
||||
|
||||
An if command looks like
|
||||
|
||||
if list
|
||||
then list
|
||||
[ elif list
|
||||
then list ] ...
|
||||
[ else list ]
|
||||
fi
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A while command looks like
|
||||
|
||||
while list
|
||||
do list
|
||||
done
|
||||
|
||||
The two lists are executed repeatedly while the exit status of the first
|
||||
list is zero. The until command is similar, but has the word until in
|
||||
place of while
|
||||
repeats until the exit status of the first list is zero.
|
||||
|
||||
The for command looks like
|
||||
|
||||
for variable in word...
|
||||
do list
|
||||
done
|
||||
|
||||
The words are expanded, and then the list is executed repeatedly with the
|
||||
variable set to each word in turn. do and done may be replaced with
|
||||
``{'' and ``}''.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The break and continue commands look like
|
||||
|
||||
break [ num ]
|
||||
continue [ num ]
|
||||
|
||||
Break terminates the num innermost for or while loops. Continue
|
||||
continues with the next iteration of the num'th innermost loop. These
|
||||
are implemented as builtin commands.
|
||||
|
||||
The case command looks like
|
||||
|
||||
case word in
|
||||
pattern) list ;;
|
||||
...
|
||||
esac
|
||||
|
||||
The pattern can actually be one or more patterns (see Patterns below),
|
||||
separated by ``|'' characters.
|
||||
|
||||
Commands may be grouped by writing either
|
||||
|
||||
(list)
|
||||
|
||||
or
|
||||
|
||||
{ list; }
|
||||
|
||||
The first of these executes the commands in a subshell.
|
||||
|
||||
A function definition looks like
|
||||
|
||||
name ( ) command
|
||||
|
||||
A function definition is an executable statement; when executed it
|
||||
installs a function named name and returns an exit status of zero. The
|
||||
command is normally a list enclosed between ``{'' and ``}''.
|
||||
|
||||
Variables may be declared to be local to a function by using a local
|
||||
command. This should appear as the first staement of a function, and
|
||||
looks like
|
||||
|
||||
local [ variable | - ] ...
|
||||
|
||||
Local is implemented as a builtin command.
|
||||
|
||||
When a variable is made local, it inherits the initial value and exported
|
||||
and readonly flags from the variable with the same name in the
|
||||
surrounding scope, if there is one. Otherwise, the variable is initially
|
||||
unset. Ash uses dynamic scoping, so that if you make the variable x
|
||||
local to function f, which then calls function g, references to the
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 3
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
variable x made inside g will refer to the variable x declared inside f,
|
||||
not to the global variable named x.
|
||||
|
||||
The only special parameter than can be made local is ``-''. Making ``-''
|
||||
local any shell options that are changed via the set command inside the
|
||||
function to be restored to their original values when the function
|
||||
returns.
|
||||
|
||||
The return command looks like
|
||||
|
||||
return [ exitstatus ]
|
||||
|
||||
It terminates the currently executing function. Return is implemented as
|
||||
a builtin command.
|
||||
|
||||
Simple Commands
|
||||
|
||||
A simple command is a sequence of words. The execution of a simple
|
||||
command proceeds as follows. First, the leading words of the form
|
||||
``name=value'' are stripped off and assigned to the environment of the
|
||||
command. Second, the words are expanded. Third, the first remaining
|
||||
word is taken as the command name that command is located. Fourth, any
|
||||
redirections are performed. Fifth, the command is executed. We look at
|
||||
these operations in reverse order.
|
||||
|
||||
The execution of the command varies with the type of command. There are
|
||||
three types of commands: shell functions, builtin commands, and normal
|
||||
programs.
|
||||
|
||||
When a shell function is executed, all of the shell positional parameters
|
||||
(except $0, which remains unchanged) are set to the parameters to the
|
||||
shell function. The variables which are explicitly placed in the
|
||||
environment of the command (by placing assignments to them before the
|
||||
function name) are made local to the function and are set to values
|
||||
given. Then the command given in the function definition is executed.
|
||||
The positional parameters are restored to their original values when the
|
||||
command completes.
|
||||
|
||||
Shell builtins are executed internally to the shell, without spawning a
|
||||
new process.
|
||||
|
||||
When a normal program is executed, the shell runs the program, passing
|
||||
the parameters and the environment to the program. If the program is a
|
||||
shell procedure, the shell will interpret the program in a subshell. The
|
||||
shell will reinitialize itself in this case, so that the effect will be
|
||||
as if a new shell had been invoked to handle the shell procedure, except
|
||||
that the location of commands located in the parent shell will be
|
||||
remembered by the child. If the program is a file beginning with ``#!'',
|
||||
the remainder of the first line specifies an interpreter for the program.
|
||||
The shell (or the operating system, under Berkeley UNIX) will run the
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 4
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
interpreter in this case. The arguments to the interpreter will consist
|
||||
of any arguments given on the first line of the program, followed by the
|
||||
name of the program, followed by the arguments passed to the program.
|
||||
|
||||
Redirection
|
||||
|
||||
Input/output redirections can be intermixed with the words in a simple
|
||||
command and can be placed following any of the other commands. When
|
||||
redirection occurs, the shell saves the old values of the file
|
||||
descriptors and restores them when the command completes. The ``<'',
|
||||
``>'', and ``>>'' redirections open a file for input, output, and
|
||||
appending, respectively. The ``<&digit'' and ``>&digit'' makes the input
|
||||
or output a duplicate of the file descriptor numbered by the digit. If a
|
||||
minus sign is used in place of a digit, the standard input or standard
|
||||
output are closed.
|
||||
|
||||
The ``<< word'' redirection takes input from a here document. As the
|
||||
shell encounters ``<<'' redirections, it collects them. The next time it
|
||||
encounters an unescaped newline, it reads the documents in turn. The
|
||||
word following the ``<<'' specifies the contents of the line that
|
||||
terminates the document. If none of the quoting methods ('', "", or \)
|
||||
are used to enter the word, then the document is treated like a word
|
||||
inside double quotes: ``$'' and backquote are expanded and backslash can
|
||||
be used to escape these and to continue long lines. The word cannot
|
||||
contain any variable or command substitutions, and its length (after
|
||||
quoting) must be in the range of 1 to 79 characters. If ``<<-'' is used
|
||||
in place of ``<<'', then leading tabs are deleted from the lines of the
|
||||
document. (This is to allow you do indent shell procedures containing
|
||||
here documents in a natural fashion.)
|
||||
|
||||
Any of the preceding redirection operators may be preceded by a single
|
||||
digit specifying the file descriptor to be redirected. There cannot be
|
||||
any white space between the digit and the redirection operator.
|
||||
|
||||
Path Search
|
||||
|
||||
When locating a command, the shell first looks to see if it has a shell
|
||||
function by that name. Then, if PATH does not contain an entry for
|
||||
"%builtin", it looks for a builtin command by that name. Finally, it
|
||||
searches each entry in PATH in turn for the command.
|
||||
|
||||
The value of the PATH variable should be a series of entries separated by
|
||||
colons. Each entry consists of a directory name, or a directory name
|
||||
followed by a flag beginning with a percent sign. The current directory
|
||||
should be indicated by an empty directory name.
|
||||
|
||||
If no percent sign is present, then the entry causes the shell to search
|
||||
for the command in the specified directory. If the flag is ``%builtin''
|
||||
then the list of shell builtin commands is searched. If the flag is
|
||||
``%func'' then the directory is searched for a file which is read as
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 5
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
input to the shell. This file should define a function whose name is the
|
||||
name of the command being searched for.
|
||||
|
||||
Command names containing a slash are simply executed without performing
|
||||
any of the above searches.
|
||||
|
||||
The Environment
|
||||
|
||||
The environment of a command is a set of name/value pairs. When the
|
||||
shell is invoked, it reads these names and values, sets the shell
|
||||
variables with these names to the corresponding values, and marks the
|
||||
variables as exported. The export command can be used to mark additional
|
||||
variables as exported.
|
||||
|
||||
The environment of a command is constructed by constructing name/value
|
||||
pairs from all the exported shell variables, and then modifying this set
|
||||
by the assignments which precede the command, if any.
|
||||
|
||||
Expansion
|
||||
|
||||
The process of evaluating words when a shell procedure is executed is
|
||||
called expansion. Expansion consists of four steps: variable
|
||||
substitution, command substitution, word splitting, and file name
|
||||
generation. If a word is the expression following the word case in a
|
||||
case statement, the file name which follows a redirection symbol, or an
|
||||
assignment to the environment of a command, then the word cannot be split
|
||||
into multiple words. In these cases, the last two steps of the expansion
|
||||
process are omitted.
|
||||
|
||||
Variable Substitution
|
||||
|
||||
To be written.
|
||||
|
||||
Command Substitution
|
||||
|
||||
Ash accepts two syntaxes for command substitution:
|
||||
|
||||
`list`
|
||||
|
||||
and
|
||||
|
||||
$(list)
|
||||
|
||||
Either of these may be included in a word. During the command
|
||||
substitution process, the command (syntactly a list) will be executed and
|
||||
anything that the command writes to the standard output will be captured
|
||||
by the shell. The final newline (if any) of the output will be deleted;
|
||||
the rest of the output will be substituted for the command in the word.
|
||||
|
||||
Word Splitting
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 6
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
When the value of a variable or the output of a command is substituted,
|
||||
the resulting text is subject to word splitting, unless the dollar sign
|
||||
introducing the variable or backquotes containing the text were enclosed
|
||||
in double quotes. In addition, ``$@'' is subject to a special type of
|
||||
splitting, even in the presence of double quotes.
|
||||
|
||||
Ash uses two different splitting algorithms. The normal approach, which
|
||||
is intended for splitting text separated by which space, is used if the
|
||||
first character of the shell variable IFS is a space. Otherwise an
|
||||
alternative experimental algorithm, which is useful for splitting
|
||||
(possibly empty) fields separated by a separator character, is used.
|
||||
|
||||
When performing splitting, the shell scans the replacement text looking
|
||||
for a character (when IFS does not begin with a space) or a sequence of
|
||||
characters (when IFS does begin with a space), deletes the character or
|
||||
sequence of characters, and spits the word into two strings at that
|
||||
point. When IFS begins with a space, the shell deletes either of the
|
||||
strings if they are null. As a special case, if the word containing the
|
||||
replacement text is the null string, the word is deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
The variable ``$@'' is special in two ways. First, splitting takes place
|
||||
between the positional parameters, even if the text is enclosed in double
|
||||
quotes. Second, if the word containing the replacement text is the null
|
||||
string and there are no positional parameters, then the word is deleted.
|
||||
The result of these rules is that "$@" is equivalent to "$1" "$2" ...
|
||||
"$n", where n is the number of positional parameters. (Note that this
|
||||
differs from the System V shell. The System V documentation claims that
|
||||
"$@" behaves this way; in fact on the System V shell "$@" is equivalent
|
||||
to "" when there are no positional paramteters.)
|
||||
|
||||
File Name Generation
|
||||
|
||||
Unless the -f flag is set, file name generation is performed after word
|
||||
splitting is complete. Each word is viewed as a series of patterns,
|
||||
separated by slashes. The process of expansion replaces the word with
|
||||
the names of all existing files whose names can be formed by replacing
|
||||
each pattern with a string that matches the specified pattern. There are
|
||||
two restrictions on this: first, a pattern cannot match a string
|
||||
containing a slash, and second, a pattern cannot match a string starting
|
||||
with a period unless the first character of the pattern is a period.
|
||||
|
||||
If a word fails to match any files and the -z flag is not set, then the
|
||||
word will be left unchanged (except that the meta-characters will be
|
||||
converted to normal characters). If the -z flag is set, then the word is
|
||||
only left unchanged if none of the patterns contain a character that can
|
||||
match anything besides itself. Otherwise the -z flag forces the word to
|
||||
be replaced with the names of the files that it matches, even if there
|
||||
are zero names.
|
||||
|
||||
Patterns
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 7
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A pattern consists of normal characters, which match themselves, and
|
||||
meta-characters. The meta-characters are ``!'', ``*'', ``?'', and ``[''.
|
||||
These characters lose there special meanings if they are quoted. When
|
||||
command or variable substitution is performed and the dollar sign or back
|
||||
quotes are not double quoted, the value of the variable or the output of
|
||||
the command is scanned for these characters and they are turned into
|
||||
meta-characters.
|
||||
|
||||
Two exclamation points at the beginning of a pattern function as a
|
||||
``not'' operator, causing the pattern to match any string that the
|
||||
remainder of the pattern does not match. Other occurances of exclamation
|
||||
points in a pattern match exclamation points. Two exclamation points are
|
||||
required rather than one to decrease the incompatibility with the System
|
||||
V shell (which does not treat exclamation points specially).
|
||||
|
||||
An asterisk (``*'') matches any string of characters. A question mark
|
||||
matches any single character. A left bracket (``['') introduces a
|
||||
character class. The end of the character class is indicated by a ``]'';
|
||||
if the ``]'' is missing then the ``['' matches a ``['' rather than
|
||||
introducing a character class. A character class matches any of the
|
||||
characters between the square brackets. A range of characters may be
|
||||
specified using a minus sign. The character class may be complemented by
|
||||
making an exclamation point the first character of the character class.
|
||||
|
||||
To include a ``]'' in a character class, make it the first character
|
||||
listed (after the ``!'', if any). To include a minus sign, make it the
|
||||
first or last character listed.
|
||||
|
||||
The /u Directory
|
||||
|
||||
By convention, the name ``/u/user'' refers to the home directory of the
|
||||
specified user. There are good reasons why this feature should be
|
||||
supported by the file system (using a feature such as symbolic links)
|
||||
rather than by the shell, but ash is capable of performing this mapping
|
||||
if the file system doesn't. If the mapping is done by ash, setting the
|
||||
-f flag will turn it off.
|
||||
|
||||
Character Set
|
||||
|
||||
Ash silently discards nul characters. Any other character will be
|
||||
handled correctly by ash, including characters with the high order bit
|
||||
set.
|
||||
|
||||
Job Names and Job Control
|
||||
|
||||
The term job refers to a process created by a shell command, or in the
|
||||
case of a pipeline, to the set of processes in the pipeline. The ways to
|
||||
refer to a job are:
|
||||
|
||||
%number
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 8
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
%string
|
||||
%%
|
||||
process_id
|
||||
|
||||
The first form identifies a job by job number. When a command is run,
|
||||
ash assigns it a job number (the lowest unused number is assigned). The
|
||||
second form identifies a job by giving a prefix of the command used to
|
||||
create the job. The prefix must be unique. If there is only one job,
|
||||
then the null prefix will identify the job, so you can refer to the job
|
||||
by writing ``%''. The third form refers to the current job. The current
|
||||
job is the last job to be stopped while it was in the foreground. (See
|
||||
the next paragraph.) The last form identifies a job by giving the
|
||||
process id of the last process in the job.
|
||||
|
||||
If the operating system that ash is running on supports job control, ash
|
||||
will allow you to use it. In this case, typing the suspend character
|
||||
(typically ^Z) while running a command will return you to ash and will
|
||||
make the suspended command the current job. You can then continue the
|
||||
job in the background by typing bg, or you can continue it in the
|
||||
foreground by typing fg.
|
||||
|
||||
Atty
|
||||
|
||||
If the shell variable ATTY is set, and the shell variable TERM is not set
|
||||
to ``emacs'', then ash generates appropriate escape sequences to talk to
|
||||
atty(1).
|
||||
|
||||
Exit Statuses
|
||||
|
||||
By tradition, an exit status of zero means that a command has succeeded
|
||||
and a nonzero exit status indicates that the command failed. This is
|
||||
better than no convention at all, but in practice it is extremely useful
|
||||
to allow commands that succeed to use the exit status to return
|
||||
information to the caller. A variety of better conventions have been
|
||||
proposed, but none of them has met with universal approval. The
|
||||
convention used by ash and all the programs included in the ash
|
||||
distribution is as follows:
|
||||
0 Success.
|
||||
1 Alternate success.
|
||||
2 Failure.
|
||||
129-... Command terminated by a signal.
|
||||
The alternate success return is used by commands to indicate various
|
||||
conditions which are not errors but which can, with a little imagination,
|
||||
be conceived of as less successful than plain success. For example, test
|
||||
returns 1 when the tested condition is false and getopts returns 1 when
|
||||
there are no more options. Because this convention is not used
|
||||
universally, the -e option of ash causes the shell to exit when a command
|
||||
returns 1 even though that contradicts the convention described here.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 9
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
When a command is terminated by a signal, the uses 128 plus the signal
|
||||
number as the exit code for the command.
|
||||
|
||||
Builtin Commands
|
||||
|
||||
This concluding section lists the builtin commands which are builtin
|
||||
because they need to perform some operation that can't be performed by a
|
||||
separate process. In addition to these, there are several other commands
|
||||
(catf, echo, expr, line, nlecho, test, ``:'', and true) which can
|
||||
optionally be compiled into the shell. The builtin commands described
|
||||
below that accept options use the System V Release 2 getopt(3) syntax.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bg [ job ] ...
|
||||
Continue the specified jobs (or the current job if no jobs are given) in
|
||||
the background. This command is only available on systems with Bekeley
|
||||
job control.
|
||||
|
||||
command command arg...
|
||||
Execute the specified builtin command. (This is useful when you have a
|
||||
shell function with the same name as a builtin command.)
|
||||
|
||||
cd [ directory ]
|
||||
Switch to the specified directory (default $HOME). If the an entry for
|
||||
CDPATH appears in the environment of the cd command or the shell variable
|
||||
CDPATH is set and the directory name does not begin with a slash, then
|
||||
the directories listed in CDPATH will be searched for the specified
|
||||
directory. The format of CDPATH is the same as that of PATH. In an
|
||||
interactive shell, the cd command will print out the name of the
|
||||
directory that it actually switched to if this is different from the name
|
||||
that the user gave. These may be different either because the CDPATH
|
||||
mechanism was used or because a symbolic link was crossed.
|
||||
|
||||
. file
|
||||
The commands in the specified file are read and executed by the shell. A
|
||||
path search is not done to find the file because the directories in PATH
|
||||
generally contain files that are intended to be executed, not read.
|
||||
|
||||
eval string...
|
||||
The strings are parsed as shell commands and executed. (This differs
|
||||
from the System V shell, which concatenates the arguments (separated by
|
||||
spaces) and parses the result as a single command.)
|
||||
|
||||
exec [ command arg... ]
|
||||
Unless command is omitted, the shell process is replaced with the
|
||||
specified program (which must be a real program, not a shell builtin or
|
||||
function). Any redirections on the exec command are marked as permanent,
|
||||
so that they are not undone when the exec command finishes. If the
|
||||
command is not found, the exec command causes the shell to exit.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 10
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
exit [ exitstatus ]
|
||||
Terminate the shell process. If exitstatus is given it is used as the
|
||||
exit status of the shell; otherwise the exit status of the preceding
|
||||
command is used.
|
||||
|
||||
export name...
|
||||
The specified names are exported so that they will appear in the
|
||||
environment of subsequent commands. The only way to un-export a variable
|
||||
is to unset it. Ash allows the value of a variable to be set at the same
|
||||
time it is exported by writing
|
||||
|
||||
export name=value
|
||||
|
||||
With no arguments the export command lists the names of all exported
|
||||
variables.
|
||||
|
||||
fg [ job ]
|
||||
Move the specified job or the current job to the foreground. This
|
||||
command is only available on systems with Bekeley job control.
|
||||
|
||||
getopts optstring var
|
||||
The System V getopts command.
|
||||
|
||||
hash -rv command...
|
||||
The shell maintains a hash table which remembers the locations of
|
||||
commands. With no arguments whatsoever, the hash command prints out the
|
||||
contents of this table. Entries which have not been looked at since the
|
||||
last cd command are marked with an asterisk; it is possible for these
|
||||
entries to be invalid.
|
||||
|
||||
With arguments, the hash command removes the specified commands from the
|
||||
hash table (unless they are functions) and then locates them. With the
|
||||
-v option, hash prints the locations of the commands as it finds them.
|
||||
The -r option causes the hash command to delete all the entries in the
|
||||
hash table except for functions.
|
||||
|
||||
jobid [ job ]
|
||||
Print the process id's of the processes in the job. If the job argument
|
||||
is omitted, use the current job.
|
||||
|
||||
jobs
|
||||
This command lists out all the background processes which are children of
|
||||
the current shell process.
|
||||
|
||||
pwd
|
||||
Print the current directory. The builtin command may differ from the
|
||||
program of the same name because the builtin command remembers what the
|
||||
current directory is rather than recomputing it each time. This makes it
|
||||
faster. However, if the current directory is renamed, the builtin
|
||||
version of pwd will continue to print the old name for the directory.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 11
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
read [ -p prompt ] [ -e ] variable...
|
||||
The prompt is printed if the -p option is specified and the standard
|
||||
input is a terminal. Then a line is read from the standard input. The
|
||||
trailing newline is deleted from the line and the line is split as
|
||||
described in the section on word splitting above, and the pieces are
|
||||
assigned to the variables in order. If there are more pieces than
|
||||
variables, the remaining pieces (along with the characters in IFS that
|
||||
separated them) are assigned to the last variable. If there are more
|
||||
variables than pieces, the remaining variables are assigned the null
|
||||
string.
|
||||
|
||||
The -e option causes any backslashes in the input to be treated
|
||||
specially. If a backslash is followed by a newline, the backslash and
|
||||
the newline will be deleted. If a backslash is followed by any other
|
||||
character, the backslash will be deleted and the following character will
|
||||
be treated as though it were not in IFS, even if it is.
|
||||
|
||||
readonly name...
|
||||
The specified names are marked as read only, so that they cannot be
|
||||
subsequently modified or unset. Ash allows the value of a variable to be
|
||||
set at the same time it is marked read only by writing
|
||||
|
||||
readonly name=value
|
||||
|
||||
With no arguments the readonly command lists the names of all read only
|
||||
variables.
|
||||
|
||||
set [ { -options | +options | -- } ] arg...
|
||||
The set command performs three different functions.
|
||||
|
||||
With no arguments, it lists the values of all shell variables.
|
||||
|
||||
If options are given, it sets the specified option flags, or clears them
|
||||
if the option flags are introduced with a + rather than a -. Only the
|
||||
first argument to set can contain options. The possible options are:
|
||||
|
||||
-e Causes the shell to exit when a command terminates with a nonzero
|
||||
exit status, except when the exit status of the command is explicitly
|
||||
tested. The exit status of a command is considered to be explicitly
|
||||
tested if the command is used to control an if, elif, while, or
|
||||
until; or if the command is the left hand operand of an ``&&'' or
|
||||
``||'' operator.
|
||||
|
||||
-f Turn off file name generation.
|
||||
|
||||
-I Cause the shell to ignore end of file conditions. (This doesn't
|
||||
apply when the shell a script sourced using the ``.'' command.) The
|
||||
shell will in fact exit if it gets 50 eof's in a row.
|
||||
|
||||
-i Make the shell interactive. This causes the shell to prompt for
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 12
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
input, to trap interrupts, to ignore quit and terminate signals, and
|
||||
to return to the main command loop rather than exiting on error.
|
||||
|
||||
-j Turns on Berkeley job control, on systems that support it. When the
|
||||
shell starts up, the -j is set by default if the -i flag is set.
|
||||
|
||||
-n Causes the shell to read commands but not execute them. (This is
|
||||
marginally useful for checking the syntax of scripts.)
|
||||
|
||||
-s If this flag is set when the shell starts up, the shell reads
|
||||
commands from its standard input. The shell doesn't examine the
|
||||
value of this flag any other time.
|
||||
|
||||
-x If this flag is set, the shell will print out each command before
|
||||
executing it.
|
||||
|
||||
-z If this flag is set, the file name generation process may generate
|
||||
zero files. If it is not set, then a pattern which does not match
|
||||
any files will be replaced by a quoted version of the pattern.
|
||||
|
||||
The third use of the set command is to set the values of the shell's
|
||||
positional parameters to the specified args. To change the positional
|
||||
parameters without changing any options, use ``--'' as the first argument
|
||||
to set. If no args are present, the set command will leave the value of
|
||||
the positional parameters unchanged, so to set the positional parameters
|
||||
to set of values that may be empty, execute the command
|
||||
|
||||
shift $#
|
||||
|
||||
first to clear out the old values of the positional parameters.
|
||||
|
||||
setvar variable value
|
||||
Assigns value to variable. (In general it is better to write
|
||||
variable=value rather than using setvar. Setvar is intended to be used
|
||||
in functions that assign values to variables whose names are passed as
|
||||
parameters.)
|
||||
|
||||
shift [ n ]
|
||||
Shift the positional parameters n times. A shift sets the value of $1 to
|
||||
the value of $2, the value of $2 to the value of $3, and so on,
|
||||
decreasing the value of $# by one. If there are zero positional
|
||||
parameters, shifting doesn't do anything.
|
||||
|
||||
trap [ action ] signal...
|
||||
Cause the shell to parse and execute action when any of the specified
|
||||
signals are received. The signals are specified by signal number.
|
||||
Action may be null or omitted; the former causes the specified signal to
|
||||
be ignored and the latter causes the default action to be taken. When
|
||||
the shell forks off a subshell, it resets trapped (but not ignored)
|
||||
signals to the default action. The trap command has no effect on signals
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 13
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
that were ignored on entry to the shell.
|
||||
|
||||
umask [ mask ]
|
||||
Set the value of umask (see umask(2)) to the specified octal value. If
|
||||
the argument is omitted, the umask value is printed.
|
||||
|
||||
unset name...
|
||||
The specified variables and functions are unset and unexported. If a
|
||||
given name corresponds to both a variable and a function, both the
|
||||
variable and the function are unset.
|
||||
|
||||
wait [ job ]
|
||||
Wait for the specified job to complete and return the exit status of the
|
||||
last process in the job. If the argument is omitted, wait for all jobs
|
||||
to complete and the return an exit status of zero.
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
The following function redefines the cd command:
|
||||
|
||||
cd() {
|
||||
if command cd "$@"
|
||||
then if test -f .enter
|
||||
then . .enter
|
||||
else return 0
|
||||
fi
|
||||
fi
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
This function causes the file ``.enter'' to be read when you enter a
|
||||
directory, if it exists. The command command is used to access the real
|
||||
cd command. The ``return 0'' ensures that the function will return an
|
||||
exit status of zero if it successfully changes to a directory that does
|
||||
not contain a ``.enter'' file. Redefining existing commands is not
|
||||
always a good idea, but this example shows that you can do it if you want
|
||||
to.
|
||||
|
||||
The suspend function distributed with ash looks like
|
||||
|
||||
# Copyright (C) 1989 by Kenneth Almquist. All rights reserved.
|
||||
# This file is part of ash, which is distributed under the terms
|
||||
# specified by the Ash General Public License.
|
||||
|
||||
suspend() {
|
||||
local -
|
||||
set +j
|
||||
kill -TSTP 0
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
This turns off job control and then sends a stop signal to the current
|
||||
process group, which suspends the shell. (When job control is turned on,
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 14
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
the shell ignores the TSTP signal.) Job control will be turned back on
|
||||
when the function returns because ``-'' is local to the function. As an
|
||||
example of what not to do, consider an earlier version of suspend:
|
||||
|
||||
suspend() {
|
||||
suspend_flag=$-
|
||||
set +j
|
||||
kill -TSTP 0
|
||||
set -$suspend_flag
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
There are two problems with this. First, suspend_flag is a global
|
||||
variable rather than a local one, which will cause problems in the
|
||||
(unlikely) circumstance that the user is using that variable for some
|
||||
other purpose. Second, consider what happens if shell received an
|
||||
interrupt signal after it executes the first set command but before it
|
||||
executes the second one. The interrupt signal will abort the shell
|
||||
function, so that the second set command will never be executed and job
|
||||
control will be left off. The first version of suspend avoids this
|
||||
problem by turning job control off only in a local copy of the shell
|
||||
options. The local copy of the shell options is discarded when the
|
||||
function is terminated, no matter how it is terminated.
|
||||
|
||||
HINTS
|
||||
Shell variables can be used to provide abbreviations for things which you
|
||||
type frequently. For example, I set
|
||||
export h=$HOME
|
||||
in my .profile so that I can type the name of my home directory simply by
|
||||
typing ``$h''.
|
||||
|
||||
When writing shell procedures, try not to make assumptions about what is
|
||||
imported from the environment. Explicitly unset or initialize all
|
||||
variables, rather than assuming they will be unset. If you use cd, it is
|
||||
a good idea to unset CDPATH.
|
||||
|
||||
People sometimes use ``<&-'' or ``>&-'' to provide no input to a command
|
||||
or to discard the output of a command. A better way to do this is to
|
||||
redirect the input or output of the command to /dev/null.
|
||||
|
||||
Word splitting and file name generation are performed by default, and you
|
||||
have to explicitly use double quotes to suppress it. This is backwards,
|
||||
but you can learn to live with it. Just get in the habit of writing
|
||||
double quotes around variable and command substitutions, and omit them
|
||||
only when you really want word splitting and file name generation. If
|
||||
you want word splitting but not file name generation, use the -f option.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 15
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SH(1) Minix Programmer's Manual SH(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHORS
|
||||
Kenneth Almquist
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
echo(1), expr(1), line(1), pwd(1), true(1).
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
When command substitution occurs inside a here document, the commands
|
||||
inside the here document are run with their standard input closed. For
|
||||
example, the following will not word because the standard input of the
|
||||
line command will be closed when the command is run:
|
||||
|
||||
cat <<-!
|
||||
Line 1: $(line)
|
||||
Line 2: $(line)
|
||||
!
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Unsetting a function which is currently being executed may cause strange
|
||||
behavior.
|
||||
|
||||
The shell syntax allows a here document to be terminated by an end of
|
||||
file as well as by a line containing the terminator word which follows
|
||||
the ``<<''. What this means is that if you mistype the terminator line,
|
||||
the shell will silently swallow up the rest of your shell script and
|
||||
stick it in the here document.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
7BSD March 7, 1991 16
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ASIZE.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ASIZE.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ASIZE(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ASIZE(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
asize - report the size of an object file
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
asize file ...
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
asize test.o # Give the size of test.o
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Asize prints for each argument the (decimal) number of bytes used by the
|
||||
different sections, as well as their sum in decimal and hexadecimal. If
|
||||
no file is given a.out is used. Asize can only be used to obtain the
|
||||
size of a (M2 .o or .out file. To obtain the size of an executable, use
|
||||
size instead.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
anm(1), nm(1), ar(1), size(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/AT.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/AT.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AT(1) Minix Programmer's Manual AT(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
at, atrun - execute commands at a later time
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
at time [month day] [file]
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
at 2315 Jan 31 myfile
|
||||
# Myfile executed Jan 31 at 11:15 pm
|
||||
|
||||
at 0900 # Job input read from stdin
|
||||
|
||||
at 0711 4 29 # Read from stdin, exec on April 29
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
At prepares a file to be executed later at the specified time by creating
|
||||
a special entry in /usr/spool/at. The program atrun should be started
|
||||
periodically, for example, every minute by cron. Atrun checks to see if
|
||||
any files in /usr/spool/at should now be run, and if so, it runs them and
|
||||
then puts them in /usr/spool/at/past. The name of the file created in
|
||||
/usr/spool/at by at is YY.DDD.HHMM.UU (where YY, DDD, HH, and MM give the
|
||||
time to execute and UU is a unique number). Note that when the command
|
||||
runs, it will not be able to use stdin or stdout unless specifically
|
||||
redirected. In the first example above, it might be necessary to put
|
||||
>/dev/log on some lines in the shell script myfile. The same holds for
|
||||
the commands typed directly to at.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cron(8).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/BANNER.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/BANNER.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
BANNER(1) Minix Programmer's Manual BANNER(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
banner - print a banner
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
banner arg ...
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
banner happy birthday
|
||||
# Print a banner saying happy birthday
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Banner prints its arguments on stdout using a matrix of 6 x 6 pixels per
|
||||
character.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/BASENAME.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/BASENAME.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
BASENAME(1) Minix Programmer's Manual BASENAME(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
basename, dirname - strip off file prefixes and suffixes
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
basename file [suffix]
|
||||
dirname file
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
(none)
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
basename /user/ast/file.c
|
||||
# Strips path to yield file.c
|
||||
|
||||
basename /user/file.c .c
|
||||
# Strips path and .c to yield file
|
||||
|
||||
dirname /user/file.c
|
||||
# Strips basename to yield /user
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Basename removes the initial directory names (if any) yielding the name
|
||||
of the file itself. If a second argument is present, it is interpreted
|
||||
as a suffix and is also stripped, if present.
|
||||
|
||||
Dirname removes the final component of a path, yielding the directory a
|
||||
file is in.
|
||||
|
||||
These programs are primarily used in shell scripts.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
885
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/BC.1
Normal file
885
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/BC.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,885 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
bc - An arbitrary precision calculator language
|
||||
|
||||
SYNTAX
|
||||
bc [ -lws ] [ file ... ]
|
||||
|
||||
VERSION
|
||||
This man page documents GNU bc version 1.02.
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
bc is a language that supports arbitrary precision numbers with
|
||||
interactive execution of statements. There are some similarities in the
|
||||
syntax to the C programming language. A standard math library is
|
||||
available by command line option. If requested, the math library is
|
||||
defined before processing any files. bc starts by processing code from
|
||||
all the files listed on the command line in the order listed. After all
|
||||
files have been processed, bc reads from the standard input. All code is
|
||||
executed as it is read. (If a file contains a command to halt the
|
||||
processor, bc will never read from the standard input.)
|
||||
|
||||
This version of bc contains several extensions beyond traditional bc
|
||||
implementations and the POSIX draft standard. Command line options can
|
||||
cause these extensions to print a warning or to be rejected. This
|
||||
document describes the language accepted by this processor. Extensions
|
||||
will be identified as such.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-l Define the standard math library.
|
||||
|
||||
-w Give warnings for extensions to POSIX bc.
|
||||
|
||||
-s Process exactly the POSIX bc language.
|
||||
|
||||
NUMBERS
|
||||
The most basic element in bc is the number. Numbers are arbitrary
|
||||
precision numbers. This precision is both in the integer part and the
|
||||
fractional part. All numbers are represented internally in decimal and
|
||||
all computation is done in decimal. (This version truncates results from
|
||||
divide and multiply operations.) There are two attributes of numbers,
|
||||
the length and the scale. The length is the total number of significant
|
||||
decimal digits in a number and the scale is the total number of decimal
|
||||
digits after the decimal point. For example:
|
||||
.000001 has a length of 6 and scale of 6.
|
||||
1935.000 has a length of 7 and a scale of 3.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
VARIABLES
|
||||
Numbers are stored in two types of variables, simple variables and
|
||||
arrays. Both simple variables and array variables are named. Names
|
||||
begin with a letter followed by any number of letters, digits and
|
||||
underscores. All letters must be lower case. (Full alpha-numeric names
|
||||
are an extension. In POSIX bc all names are a single lower case letter.)
|
||||
The type of variable is clear by the context because all array variable
|
||||
names will be followed by brackets ([]).
|
||||
|
||||
There are four special variables, scale, ibase, obase, and last. scale
|
||||
defines how some operations use digits after the decimal point. The
|
||||
default value of scale is 0. ibase and obase define the conversion base
|
||||
for input and output numbers. The default for both input and output is
|
||||
base 10. last (an extension) is a variable that has the value of the
|
||||
last printed number. These will be discussed in further detail where
|
||||
appropriate. All of these variables may have values assigned to them as
|
||||
well as used in expressions.
|
||||
|
||||
COMMENTS
|
||||
Comments in bc start with the characters /* and end with the characters
|
||||
*/. Comments may start anywhere and appear as a single space in the
|
||||
input. (This causes comments to delimit other input items. For example,
|
||||
a comment can not be found in the middle of a variable name.) Comments
|
||||
include any newlines (end of line) between the start and the end of the
|
||||
comment.
|
||||
|
||||
EXPRESSIONS
|
||||
The numbers are manipulated by expressions and statements. Since the
|
||||
language was designed to be interactive, statements and expressions are
|
||||
executed as soon as possible. There is no "main" program. Instead, code
|
||||
is executed as it is encountered. (Functions, discussed in detail later,
|
||||
are defined when encountered.)
|
||||
|
||||
A simple expression is just a constant. bc converts constants into
|
||||
internal decimal numbers using the current input base, specified by the
|
||||
variable ibase. (There is an exception in functions.) The legal values
|
||||
of ibase are 2 through 16 (F). Assigning a value outside this range to
|
||||
ibase will result in a value of 2 or 16. Input numbers may contain the
|
||||
characters 0-9 and A-F. (Note: They must be capitals. Lower case
|
||||
letters are variable names.) Single digit numbers always have the value
|
||||
of the digit regardless of the value of ibase. (i.e. A = 10.) For multi-
|
||||
digit numbers, bc changes all input digits greater or equal to ibase to
|
||||
the value of ibase-1. This makes the number FFF always be the largest 3
|
||||
digit number of the input base.
|
||||
|
||||
Full expressions are similar to many other high level languages. Since
|
||||
there is only one kind of number, there are no rules for mixing types.
|
||||
Instead, there are rules on the scale of expressions. Every expression
|
||||
has a scale. This is derived from the scale of original numbers, the
|
||||
operation performed and in many cases, the value of the variable scale.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Legal values of the variable scale are 0 to the maximum number
|
||||
representable by a C integer.
|
||||
|
||||
In the following descriptions of legal expressions, "expr" refers to a
|
||||
complete expression and "var" refers to a simple or an array variable. A
|
||||
simple variable is just a
|
||||
name
|
||||
and an array variable is specified as
|
||||
name[expr]
|
||||
Unless specifically mentioned the scale of the result is the maximum
|
||||
scale of the expressions involved.
|
||||
|
||||
- expr
|
||||
The result is the negation of the expression.
|
||||
|
||||
++ var
|
||||
The variable is incremented by one and the new value is the result
|
||||
of the expression.
|
||||
|
||||
-- var
|
||||
The variable is decremented by one and the new value is the result
|
||||
of the expression.
|
||||
|
||||
var ++
|
||||
The result of the expression is the value of the variable and then
|
||||
the variable is incremented by one.
|
||||
|
||||
var --
|
||||
The result of the expression is the value of the variable and then
|
||||
the variable is decremented by one.
|
||||
|
||||
expr + expr
|
||||
The result of the expression is the sum of the two expressions.
|
||||
|
||||
expr - expr
|
||||
The result of the expression is the difference of the two
|
||||
expressions.
|
||||
|
||||
expr * expr
|
||||
The result of the expression is the product of the two expressions.
|
||||
|
||||
expr / expr
|
||||
The result of the expression is the quotient of the two expressions.
|
||||
The scale of the result is the value of the variable scale.
|
||||
|
||||
expr % expr
|
||||
The result of the expression is the "remainder" and it is computed
|
||||
in the following way. To compute a%b, first a/b is computed to
|
||||
scale digits. That result is used to compute a-(a/b)*b to the scale
|
||||
of the maximum of scale+scale(b) and scale(a). If scale is set to
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 3
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
zero and both expressions are integers this expression is the
|
||||
integer remainder function.
|
||||
|
||||
expr ^ expr
|
||||
The result of the expression is the value of the first raised to the
|
||||
second. The second expression must be an integer. (If the second
|
||||
expression is not an integer, a warning is generated and the
|
||||
expression is truncated to get an integer value.) The scale of the
|
||||
result is scale if the exponent is negative. If the exponent is
|
||||
positive the scale of the result is the minimum of the scale of the
|
||||
first expression times the value of the exponent and the maximum of
|
||||
scale and the scale of the first expression. (e.g. scale(a^b) =
|
||||
min(scale(a)*b, max( scale, scale(a))).) It should be noted that
|
||||
expr^0 will always return the value of 1.
|
||||
|
||||
( expr )
|
||||
This alters the standard precedence to force the evaluation of the
|
||||
expression.
|
||||
|
||||
var = expr
|
||||
The variable is assigned the value of the expression.
|
||||
|
||||
var <op>= expr
|
||||
This is equivalent to "var = var <op> expr" with the exception that
|
||||
the "var" part is evaluated only once. This can make a difference
|
||||
if "var" is an array.
|
||||
|
||||
Relational expressions are a special kind of expression that always
|
||||
evaluate to 0 or 1, 0 if the relation is false and 1 if the relation is
|
||||
true. These may appear in any legal expression. (POSIX bc requires that
|
||||
relational expressions are used only in if, while, and for statements and
|
||||
that only one relational test may be done in them.) The relational
|
||||
operators are
|
||||
|
||||
expr1 < expr2
|
||||
The result is 1 if expr1 is strictly less than expr2.
|
||||
|
||||
expr1 <= expr2
|
||||
The result is 1 if expr1 is less than or equal to expr2.
|
||||
|
||||
expr1 > expr2
|
||||
The result is 1 if expr1 is strictly greater than expr2.
|
||||
|
||||
expr1 >= expr2
|
||||
The result is 1 if expr1 is greater than or equal to expr2.
|
||||
|
||||
expr1 == expr2
|
||||
The result is 1 if expr1 is equal to expr2.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 4
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
expr1 != expr2
|
||||
The result is 1 if expr1 is not equal to expr2.
|
||||
|
||||
Boolean operations are also legal. (POSIX bc does NOT have boolean
|
||||
operations). The result of all boolean operations are 0 and 1 (for false
|
||||
and true) as in relational expressions. The boolean operators are:
|
||||
|
||||
!expr
|
||||
The result is 1 if expr is 0.
|
||||
|
||||
expr && expr
|
||||
The result is 1 if both expressions are non-zero.
|
||||
|
||||
expr || expr
|
||||
The result is 1 if either expression is non-zero.
|
||||
|
||||
The expression precedence is as follows: (lowest to highest)
|
||||
|| operator, left associative
|
||||
&& operator, left associative
|
||||
! operator, nonassociative
|
||||
Relational operators, left associative
|
||||
Assignment operator, right associative
|
||||
+ and - operators, left associative
|
||||
*, / and % operators, left associative
|
||||
^ operator, right associative
|
||||
unary - operator, nonassociative
|
||||
++ and -- operators, nonassociative
|
||||
|
||||
This precedence was chosen so that POSIX compliant bc programs will run
|
||||
correctly. This will cause the use of the relational and logical
|
||||
operators to have some unusual behavior when used with assignment
|
||||
expressions. Consider the expression:
|
||||
a = 3 < 5
|
||||
|
||||
Most C programmers would assume this would assign the result of "3 < 5"
|
||||
(the value 1) to the variable "a". What this does in bc is assign the
|
||||
value 3 to the variable "a" and then compare 3 to 5. It is best to use
|
||||
parenthesis when using relational and logical operators with the
|
||||
assignment operators.
|
||||
|
||||
There are a few more special expressions that are provided in bc. These
|
||||
have to do with user defined functions and standard functions. They all
|
||||
appear as "name(parameters)". See the section on functions for user
|
||||
defined functions. The standard functions are:
|
||||
|
||||
length ( expression )
|
||||
The value of the length function is the number of significant digits
|
||||
in the expression.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 5
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
read ( )
|
||||
The read function (an extension) will read a number from the
|
||||
standard input, regardless of where the function occurs. Beware,
|
||||
this can cause problems with the mixing of data and program in the
|
||||
standard input. The best use for this function is in a previously
|
||||
written program that needs input from the user, but never allows
|
||||
program code to be input from the user. The value of the read
|
||||
function is the number read from the standard input using the
|
||||
current value of the variable ibase for the conversion base.
|
||||
|
||||
scale ( expression )
|
||||
The value of the scale function is the number of digits after the
|
||||
decimal point in the expression.
|
||||
|
||||
sqrt ( expression )
|
||||
The value of the sqrt function is the square root of the expression.
|
||||
If the expression is negative, a run time error is generated.
|
||||
|
||||
STATEMENTS
|
||||
Statements (as in most algebraic languages) provide the sequencing of
|
||||
expression evaluation. In bc statements are executed "as soon as
|
||||
possible." Execution happens when a newline in encountered and there is
|
||||
one or more complete statements. Due to this immediate execution,
|
||||
newlines are very important in bc. In fact, both a semicolon and a
|
||||
newline are used as statement separators. An improperly placed newline
|
||||
will cause a syntax error. Because newlines are statement separators, it
|
||||
is possible to hide a newline by using the backslash character. The
|
||||
sequence "\<nl>", where <nl> is the newline appears to bc as whitespace
|
||||
instead of a newline. A statement list is a series of statements
|
||||
separated by semicolons and newlines. The following is a list of bc
|
||||
statements and what they do: (Things enclosed in brackets ([]) are
|
||||
optional parts of the statement.)
|
||||
|
||||
expression
|
||||
This statement does one of two things. If the expression starts
|
||||
with "<variable> <assignment> ...", it is considered to be an
|
||||
assignment statement. If the expression is not an assignment
|
||||
statement, the expression is evaluated and printed to the output.
|
||||
After the number is printed, a newline is printed. For example,
|
||||
"a=1" is an assignment statement and "(a=1)" is an expression that
|
||||
has an embedded assignment. All numbers that are printed are
|
||||
printed in the base specified by the variable obase. The legal
|
||||
values for obase are 2 through BC_BASE_MAX. (See the section
|
||||
LIMITS.) For bases 2 through 16, the usual method of writing
|
||||
numbers is used. For bases greater than 16, bc uses a multi-
|
||||
character digit method of printing the numbers where each higher
|
||||
base digit is printed as a base 10 number. The multi-character
|
||||
digits are separated by spaces. Each digit contains the number of
|
||||
characters required to represent the base ten value of "obase-1".
|
||||
Since numbers are of arbitrary precision, some numbers may not be
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 6
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
printable on a single output line. These long numbers will be split
|
||||
across lines using the "\" as the last character on a line. The
|
||||
maximum number of characters printed per line is 70. Due to the
|
||||
interactive nature of bc printing a number cause the side effect of
|
||||
assigning the printed value the the special variable last. This
|
||||
allows the user to recover the last value printed without having to
|
||||
retype the expression that printed the number. Assigning to last is
|
||||
legal and will overwrite the last printed value with the assigned
|
||||
value. The newly assigned value will remain until the next number
|
||||
is printed or another value is assigned to last.
|
||||
|
||||
string
|
||||
The string is printed to the output. Strings start with a double
|
||||
quote character and contain all characters until the next double
|
||||
quote character. All characters are take literally, including any
|
||||
newline. No newline character is printed after the string.
|
||||
|
||||
print list
|
||||
The print statement (an extension) provides another method of
|
||||
output. The "list" is a list of strings and expressions separated
|
||||
by commas. Each string or expression is printed in the order of the
|
||||
list. No terminating newline is printed. Expressions are evaluated
|
||||
and their value is printed and assigned the the variable last.
|
||||
Strings in the print statement are printed to the output and may
|
||||
contain special characters. Special characters start with the
|
||||
backslash character (\). The special characters recognized by bc
|
||||
are "b" (bell), "f" (form feed), "n" (newline), "r" (carriage
|
||||
return), "t" (tab), and "\" (backslash). Any other character
|
||||
following the backslash will be ignored. This still does not allow
|
||||
the double quote character to be part of any string.
|
||||
|
||||
{ statement_list }
|
||||
This is the compound statement. It allows multiple statements to be
|
||||
grouped together for execution.
|
||||
|
||||
if ( expression ) then statement1 [else statement2]
|
||||
The if statement evaluates the expression and executes statement1 or
|
||||
statement2 depending on the value of the expression. If the
|
||||
expression is non-zero, statement1 is executed. If statement2 is
|
||||
present and the value of the expression is 0, then statement2 is
|
||||
executed. (The else clause is an extension.)
|
||||
|
||||
while ( expression ) statement
|
||||
The while statement will execute the statement while the expression
|
||||
is non-zero. It evaluates the expression before each execution of
|
||||
the statement. Termination of the loop is caused by a zero
|
||||
expression value or the execution of a break statement.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 7
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
for ( [expression1] ; [expression2] ; [expression3] ) statement
|
||||
The for statement controls repeated execution of the statement.
|
||||
Expression1 is evaluated before the loop. Expression2 is evaluated
|
||||
before each execution of the statement. If it is non-zero, the
|
||||
statement is evaluated. If it is zero, the loop is terminated.
|
||||
After each execution of the statement, expression3 is evaluated
|
||||
before the reevaluation of expression2. If expression1 or
|
||||
expression3 are missing, nothing is evaluated at the point they
|
||||
would be evaluated. If expression2 is missing, it is the same as
|
||||
substituting the value 1 for expression2. (The optional expressions
|
||||
are an extension. POSIX bc requires all three expressions.) The
|
||||
following is equivalent code for the for statement:
|
||||
expression1;
|
||||
while (expression2) {
|
||||
statement;
|
||||
expression3;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
break
|
||||
This statement causes a forced exit of the most recent enclosing
|
||||
while statement or for statement.
|
||||
|
||||
continue
|
||||
The continue statement (an extension) causes the most recent
|
||||
enclosing for statement to start the next iteration.
|
||||
|
||||
halt The halt statement (an extension) is an executed statement that
|
||||
causes the bc processor to quit only when it is executed. For
|
||||
example, "if (0 == 1) halt" will not cause bc to terminate because
|
||||
the halt is not executed.
|
||||
|
||||
return
|
||||
Return the value 0 from a function. (See the section on functions.)
|
||||
|
||||
return ( expression )
|
||||
Return the value of the expression from a function. (See the
|
||||
section on functions.)
|
||||
|
||||
PSEUDO STATEMENTS
|
||||
These statements are not statements in the traditional sense. They are
|
||||
not executed statements. Their function is performed at "compile" time.
|
||||
|
||||
limits
|
||||
Print the local limits enforced by the local version of bc. This is
|
||||
an extension.
|
||||
|
||||
quit When the quit statement is read, the bc processor is terminated,
|
||||
regardless of where the quit statement is found. For example, "if
|
||||
(0 == 1) quit" will cause bc to terminate.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 8
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
warranty
|
||||
Print a longer warranty notice. This is an extension.
|
||||
|
||||
FUNCTIONS
|
||||
Functions provide a method of defining a computation that can be executed
|
||||
later. Functions in bc always compute a value and return it to the
|
||||
caller. Function definitions are "dynamic" in the sense that a function
|
||||
is undefined until a definition is encountered in the input. That
|
||||
definition is then used until another definition function for the same
|
||||
name is encountered. The new definition then replaces the older
|
||||
definition. A function is defined as follows:
|
||||
define name ( parameters ) { newline
|
||||
auto_list statement_list }
|
||||
A function call is just an expression of the form "name(parameters)".
|
||||
|
||||
Parameters are numbers or arrays (an extension). In the function
|
||||
definition, zero or more parameters are defined by listing their names
|
||||
separated by commas. Numbers are only call by value parameters. Arrays
|
||||
are only call by variable. Arrays are specified in the parameter
|
||||
definition by the notation "name[]". In the function call, actual
|
||||
parameters are full expressions for number parameters. The same notation
|
||||
is used for passing arrays as for defining array parameters. The named
|
||||
array is passed by variable to the function. Since function definitions
|
||||
are dynamic, parameter numbers and types are checked when a function is
|
||||
called. Any mismatch in number or types of parameters will cause a
|
||||
runtime error. A runtime error will also occur for the call to an
|
||||
undefined function.
|
||||
|
||||
The auto_list is an optional list of variables that are for "local" use.
|
||||
The syntax of the auto list (if present) is "auto name, ... ;". (The
|
||||
semicolon is optional.) Each name is the name of an auto variable.
|
||||
Arrays may be specified by using the same notation as used in parameters.
|
||||
These variables have their values pushed onto a stack at the start of the
|
||||
function. The variables are then initialized to zero and used throughout
|
||||
the execution of the function. At function exit, these variables are
|
||||
popped so that the original value (at the time of the function call) of
|
||||
these variables are restored. The parameters are really auto variables
|
||||
that are initialized to a value provided in the function call. Auto
|
||||
variables are different than traditional local variables in the fact that
|
||||
if function A calls function B, B may access function A's auto variables
|
||||
by just using the same name, unless function B has called them auto
|
||||
variables. Due to the fact that auto variables and parameters are pushed
|
||||
onto a stack, bc supports recursive functions.
|
||||
|
||||
The function body is a list of bc statements. Again, statements are
|
||||
separated by semicolons or newlines. Return statements cause the
|
||||
termination of a function and the return of a value. There are two
|
||||
versions of the return statement. The first form, "return", returns the
|
||||
value 0 to the calling expression. The second form, "return ( expression
|
||||
)", computes the value of the expression and returns that value to the
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 9
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
calling expression. There is an implied "return (0)" at the end of every
|
||||
function. This allows a function to terminate and return 0 without an
|
||||
explicit return statement.
|
||||
|
||||
Functions also change the usage of the variable ibase. All constants in
|
||||
the function body will be converted using the value of ibase at the time
|
||||
of the function call. Changes of ibase will be ignored during the
|
||||
execution of the function except for the standard function read, which
|
||||
will always use the current value of ibase for conversion of numbers.
|
||||
|
||||
MATH LIBRARY
|
||||
If bc is invoked with the -l option, a math library is preloaded and the
|
||||
default scale is set to 20. The math functions will calculate their
|
||||
results to the scale set at the time of their call. The math library
|
||||
defines the following functions:
|
||||
|
||||
s (x)
|
||||
The sine of x in radians.
|
||||
|
||||
c (x)
|
||||
The cosine of x in radians.
|
||||
|
||||
a (x)
|
||||
The arctangent of x.
|
||||
|
||||
l (x)
|
||||
The natural logarithm of x.
|
||||
|
||||
e (x)
|
||||
The exponential function of raising e to the value x.
|
||||
|
||||
j (n,x)
|
||||
The bessel function of integer order n of x.
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
In /bin/sh, the following will assign the value of "pi" to the shell
|
||||
variable pi.
|
||||
pi=$(echo "scale=10; 4*a(1)" | bc -l)
|
||||
|
||||
The following is the definition of the exponential function used in the
|
||||
math library. This function is written in POSIX bc.
|
||||
|
||||
scale = 20
|
||||
|
||||
/* Uses the fact that e^x = (e^(x/2))^2
|
||||
When x is small enough, we use the series:
|
||||
e^x = 1 + x + x^2/2! + x^3/3! + ...
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
define e(x) {
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 10
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
auto a, d, e, f, i, m, v, z
|
||||
|
||||
/* Check the sign of x. */
|
||||
if (x<0) {
|
||||
m = 1
|
||||
x = -x
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
/* Precondition x. */
|
||||
z = scale;
|
||||
scale = 4 + z + .44*x;
|
||||
while (x > 1) {
|
||||
f += 1;
|
||||
x /= 2;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
/* Initialize the variables. */
|
||||
v = 1+x
|
||||
a = x
|
||||
d = 1
|
||||
|
||||
for (i=2; 1; i++) {
|
||||
e = (a *= x) / (d *= i)
|
||||
if (e == 0) {
|
||||
if (f>0) while (f--) v = v*v;
|
||||
scale = z
|
||||
if (m) return (1/v);
|
||||
return (v/1);
|
||||
}
|
||||
v += e
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The following is code that uses the extended features of bc to implement
|
||||
a simple program for calculating checkbook balances. This program is
|
||||
best kept in a file so that it can be used many times without having to
|
||||
retype it at every use.
|
||||
|
||||
scale=2
|
||||
print "\nCheck book program!\n"
|
||||
print " Remember, deposits are negative transactions.\n"
|
||||
print " Exit by a 0 transaction.\n\n"
|
||||
|
||||
print "Initial balance? "; bal = read()
|
||||
bal /= 1
|
||||
print "\n"
|
||||
while (1) {
|
||||
"current balance = "; bal
|
||||
"transaction? "; trans = read()
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 11
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
if (trans == 0) break;
|
||||
bal -= trans
|
||||
bal /= 1
|
||||
}
|
||||
quit
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The following is the definition of the recursive factorial function.
|
||||
|
||||
define f (x) {
|
||||
if (x <= 1) return (1);
|
||||
return (f(x-1) * x);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DIFFERENCES
|
||||
This version of bc was implemented from the POSIX P1003.2/D11 draft and
|
||||
contains several differences and extensions relative to the draft and
|
||||
traditional implementations. It is not implemented in the traditional
|
||||
way using dc(1). This version is a single process which parses and runs a
|
||||
byte code translation of the program. There is an "undocumented" option
|
||||
(-c) that causes the program to output the byte code to the standard
|
||||
output instead of running it. It was mainly used for debugging the
|
||||
parser and preparing the math library.
|
||||
|
||||
A major source of differences is extensions, where a feature is extended
|
||||
to add more functionality and additions, where new features are added.
|
||||
The following is the list of differences and extensions.
|
||||
|
||||
LANG This version does not conform to the POSIX standard in the
|
||||
processing of the LANG environment variable and all
|
||||
environment variables starting with LC_.
|
||||
|
||||
names Traditional and POSIX bc have single letter names for
|
||||
functions, variables and arrays. They have been extended to
|
||||
be multi-character names that start with a letter and may
|
||||
contain letters, numbers and the underscore character.
|
||||
|
||||
Strings Strings are not allowed to contain NUL characters. POSIX says
|
||||
all characters must be included in strings.
|
||||
|
||||
last POSIX bc does not have a last variable. Some implementations
|
||||
of bc use the period (.) in a similar way.
|
||||
|
||||
comparisons
|
||||
POSIX bc allows comparisons only in the if statement, the
|
||||
while statement, and the second expression of the for
|
||||
statement. Also, only one relational operation is allowed in
|
||||
each of those statements.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 12
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
if statement, else clause
|
||||
POSIX bc does not have an else clause.
|
||||
|
||||
for statement
|
||||
POSIX bc requires all expressions to be present in the for
|
||||
statement.
|
||||
|
||||
&&, ||, ! POSIX bc does not have the logical operators.
|
||||
|
||||
read function
|
||||
POSIX bc does not have a read function.
|
||||
|
||||
print statement
|
||||
POSIX bc does not have a print statement .
|
||||
|
||||
continue statement
|
||||
POSIX bc does not have a continue statement.
|
||||
|
||||
array parameters
|
||||
POSIX bc does not have array parameters. Other
|
||||
implementations of bc may have call by value array parameters.
|
||||
|
||||
=+, =-, =*, =/, =%, =^
|
||||
POSIX bc does not require these "old style" assignment
|
||||
operators to be defined. This version may allow these "old
|
||||
style" assignments. Use the limits statement to see if the
|
||||
installed version supports them. If it does support the "old
|
||||
style" assignment operators, the statement "a =- 1" will
|
||||
decrement a by 1 instead of setting a to the value -1.
|
||||
|
||||
spaces in numbers
|
||||
Other implementations of bc allow spaces in numbers. For
|
||||
example, "x=1 3" would assign the value 13 to the variable x.
|
||||
The same statement would cause a syntax error in this version
|
||||
of bc.
|
||||
|
||||
errors and execution
|
||||
This implementation varies from other implementations in terms
|
||||
of what code will be executed when syntax and other errors are
|
||||
found in the program. If a syntax error is found in a
|
||||
function definition, error recovery tries to find the
|
||||
beginning of a statement and continue to parse the function.
|
||||
Once a syntax error is found in the function, the function
|
||||
will not be callable and becomes undefined. Syntax errors in
|
||||
the interactive execution code will invalidate the current
|
||||
execution block. The execution block is terminated by an end
|
||||
of line that appears after a complete sequence of statements.
|
||||
For example,
|
||||
a = 1
|
||||
b = 2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 13
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
has two execution blocks and
|
||||
{ a = 1
|
||||
b = 2 }
|
||||
has one execution block. Any runtime error will terminate the
|
||||
execution of the current execution block. A runtime warning
|
||||
will not terminate the current execution block.
|
||||
|
||||
Interrupts During an interactive session, the SIGINT signal (usually
|
||||
generated by the control-C character from the terminal) will
|
||||
cause execution of the current execution block to be
|
||||
interrupted. It will display a "runtime" error indicating
|
||||
which function was interrupted. After all runtime structures
|
||||
have been cleaned up, a message will be printed to notify the
|
||||
user that bc is ready for more input. All previously defined
|
||||
functions remain defined and the value of all non-auto
|
||||
variables are the value at the point of interruption. All
|
||||
auto variables and function parameters are removed during the
|
||||
clean up process. During a non-interactive session, the
|
||||
SIGINT signal will terminate the entire run of bc.
|
||||
|
||||
LIMITS
|
||||
The following are the limits currently in place for this bc processor.
|
||||
Some of them may have been changed by an installation. Use the limits
|
||||
statement to see the actual values.
|
||||
|
||||
BC_BASE_MAX
|
||||
The maximum output base is currently set at 999. The maximum
|
||||
input base is 16.
|
||||
|
||||
BC_DIM_MAX This is currently an arbitrary limit of 65535 as distributed.
|
||||
Your installation may be different.
|
||||
|
||||
BC_SCALE_MAX
|
||||
The number of digits after the decimal point is limited to
|
||||
INT_MAX digits. Also, the number of digits before the decimal
|
||||
point is limited to INT_MAX digits.
|
||||
|
||||
BC_STRING_MAX
|
||||
The limit on the number of characters in a string is INT_MAX
|
||||
characters.
|
||||
|
||||
exponent The value of the exponent in the raise operation (^) is
|
||||
limited to LONG_MAX.
|
||||
|
||||
multiply The multiply routine may yield incorrect results if a number
|
||||
has more than LONG_MAX / 90 total digits. For 32 bit longs,
|
||||
this number is 23,860,929 digits.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 14
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bc(1) Minix Programmer's Manual bc(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
code size Each function and the "main" program are limited to 10240
|
||||
bytes of compiled byte code each. This limit (BC_MAX_SEGS)
|
||||
can be easily changed to have more than 10 segments of 1024
|
||||
bytes.
|
||||
|
||||
variable names
|
||||
The current limit on the number of unique names is 32767 for
|
||||
each of simple variables, arrays and functions.
|
||||
|
||||
FILES
|
||||
In most installations, bc is completely self-contained. Where executable
|
||||
size is of importance or the C compiler does not deal with very long
|
||||
strings, bc will read the standard math library from the file
|
||||
/usr/local/lib/libmath.b. (The actual location may vary. It may be
|
||||
/lib/libmath.b.)
|
||||
|
||||
DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
If any file on the command line can not be opened, bc will report that
|
||||
the file is unavailable and terminate. Also, there are compile and run
|
||||
time diagnostics that should be self-explanatory.
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
Error recovery is not very good yet.
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Philip A. Nelson
|
||||
phil@cs.wwu.edu
|
||||
|
||||
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
|
||||
The author would like to thank Steve Sommars (sesv@iwtsf.att.com) for his
|
||||
extensive help in testing the implementation. Many great suggestions
|
||||
were given. This is a much better product due to his involvement.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
.\ 15
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/BSFILT.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/BSFILT.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
BSFILT(1) Minix Programmer's Manual BSFILT(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
bsfilt, colcrt - a colcrt-like backspace filter
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
bsfilt [ - ] [ -U ] [ file ... ]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Bsfilt filters backspace sequences from the input file(s) (standard input
|
||||
if none) in an approximation of colcrt(1). Both the backspace and the
|
||||
character it returns to are removed, unless they form an underline
|
||||
sequence. Underline sequences are treated according to the settings of
|
||||
the - and -U options.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
- specifies that no underlining of any kind is to be propagated.
|
||||
Without this option or the -U option, bsfilt approximates
|
||||
underlining with minus signs (`-') in following lines.
|
||||
|
||||
-U specifies that underlining with underscore (`_') and backspace (`b')
|
||||
character sequences is permitted.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cawf(1), colcrt(1) and nroff(1).
|
||||
|
||||
DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
Diagnostic messages are delivered to the standard error file.
|
||||
|
||||
HISTORY
|
||||
Vic Abell of Purdue University wrote bsfilt to have a backspace filter
|
||||
for cawf(1) that is independent of licensed source code.
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
The maximum length of a line that can be underlined with minus signs is
|
||||
fixed.
|
||||
|
||||
Bsfilt does not examine the characters that are being overprinted via
|
||||
backspace operations. Thus, overprinting that is intended to form a new
|
||||
character from several different ones is ineffective and only the last
|
||||
character of the sequence is propagated - e. g., ``o^H+'', intended to
|
||||
look like a bullet, is reduced to `+'.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Purdue University February, 1991 1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/BTOA.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/BTOA.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
BTOA(1) Minix Programmer's Manual BTOA(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
btoa - binary to ascii conversion
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
btoa [-adhor] [infile] [outfile]
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-a Decode, rather than encode, the file
|
||||
|
||||
-d Extracts repair file from diagnosis file
|
||||
|
||||
-h Help menu is displayed giving the options
|
||||
|
||||
-o The obsolete algorithm is used for backward compatibility
|
||||
|
||||
-r Repair a damaged file
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
btoa <a.out >a.btoa # Convert a.out to ASCII
|
||||
|
||||
btoa -a <a.btoa >a.out
|
||||
# Reverse the above
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Btoa is a filter that converts a binary file to ascii for transmission
|
||||
over a telephone line. If two file names are provided, the first in used
|
||||
for input and the second for output. If only one is provided, it is used
|
||||
as the input file. The program is a functionally similar alternative to
|
||||
uue/uud, but the encoding is completely different. Since both of these
|
||||
are widely used, both have been provided with MINIX. The file is
|
||||
expanded about 25 percent in the process.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
uue(1), uud(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CAL.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CAL.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CAL(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CAL(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
cal - print a calendar
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
cal [month] year
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
cal 3 1992 # Print March 1992
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Cal prints a calendar for a month or year. The year can be between 1 and
|
||||
9999. Note that the year 91 is not a synonym for 1991, but is itself a
|
||||
valid year about 19 centuries ago. The calendar produced is the one used
|
||||
by England and her colonies. Try Sept. 1752, Feb 1900, and Feb 2000. If
|
||||
you do not understand what is going on, look up Calendar, Gregorian in a
|
||||
good encyclopedia.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CALENDAR.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CALENDAR.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CALENDAR(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CALENDAR(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
calendar - reminder service
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
calendar [-] [-r]
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
- Work for every user and send mail to him
|
||||
|
||||
-r Restrict multiple execution on the same day
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
calendar # Check calendar file in current directory
|
||||
|
||||
calendar # Normary used under the control of cron(8)
|
||||
|
||||
calendar -r # Normary used in /etc/rc file
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Basically calendar program consults the file calendar in the current
|
||||
directory and display lines which contain today's or tomorrow's date.
|
||||
Month-day formats such as '12/25', 'Dec. 25', 'december 25', '*/25',
|
||||
'12/*', '*/*' are recognized. The asterisk means 'all' days or 'all'
|
||||
months. On weekends 'tomorrow' extends through next Monday without any
|
||||
consideration about holidays. To prevent ambiguity, the formats '25
|
||||
Dec.' and '25/12' are not recognized.
|
||||
|
||||
When an argument - is present, calendar works for all users with a file
|
||||
calendar in their login directories and sends them mail. Normally this
|
||||
is done daily under the control of cron.
|
||||
|
||||
The -r option does its the same job as - option, but touches the calendar
|
||||
to prevents further access on the same day. Normally this is done in the
|
||||
/etc/rc file on a machine which may be booted several times in one day.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cron(8).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CAT.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CAT.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CAT(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CAT(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
cat - concatenate files and write them to stdout
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
cat [-u] [file] ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-u Unbuffered output
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
cat file # Display file on the terminal
|
||||
|
||||
cat file1 file2 | lpr
|
||||
# Concatenate 2 files and print result
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Cat concatenates its input files and copies the result to stdout. If no
|
||||
input file is named, or - is encountered as a file name, standard input
|
||||
is used. Output is buffered in 512 byte blocks unless the -u flag is
|
||||
given. If you just want to copy a file, cp should be used since it is
|
||||
faster.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cp(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
531
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CAWF.1
Normal file
531
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CAWF.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,531 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CAWF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CAWF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
cawf, nroff - C version of the nroff-like, Amazingly Workable (text)
|
||||
Formatter
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
cawf [ -cconfig ] [ -ddevice ] [ -e ] [ -ffont ] [ -h ] [ -macros ] [
|
||||
file ... ]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Cawf formats the text from the input file(s) (standard input if none) in
|
||||
an approximation of nroff. It comes closest to duplicating nroff's man
|
||||
or ms macro package styles. It has some limited support for nroff's me
|
||||
macros.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
Options must precede file names.
|
||||
|
||||
-cconfig
|
||||
defines an alternate path to the device configuration file.
|
||||
Normally the device configuration file is found in device.cf in the
|
||||
cawf library (see the FILES section).
|
||||
|
||||
The device configuration file contains device character strings for
|
||||
selecting fonts and the bold or italic type faces. See the DEVICES
|
||||
section for more information.
|
||||
|
||||
-ddevice
|
||||
specifies the name of the output device. There are three built-in
|
||||
devices - ANSI, NONE and NORMAL - and other devices may be defined
|
||||
in the device configuration file. See the DEVICES section for more
|
||||
information.
|
||||
|
||||
The NORMAL device is the default.
|
||||
|
||||
-e directs cawf to issue an eject (FF or ^L) after the last page.
|
||||
|
||||
-ffont
|
||||
specifies the one font for the device, declared with the -ddevice
|
||||
option, that is to be used for the entire document. Font must match
|
||||
a font associated with the device's stanza in the device
|
||||
configuration file. See the DEVICES section for more information.
|
||||
|
||||
No font may be specified for the built-in devices ANSI, NONE or
|
||||
NORMAL.
|
||||
|
||||
-h requests a help display.
|
||||
|
||||
-macro
|
||||
specifies the macro file to be used. The standard cawf distribution
|
||||
supplies macro files to support ``-man'', ``-me'' or ``-ms''. Cawf
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Purdue University November, 1992 1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CAWF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CAWF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
finds a macro file by constructing its name from `m', acro and .mac
|
||||
- e. g., -man is converted to man.mac. The default directory for
|
||||
macro files is defined when cawf is compiled; it's C:\SYS\LIB\CAWF
|
||||
in the MS-DOS environment; /usr/lib/cawf in the UNIX environment.
|
||||
|
||||
file ...
|
||||
are the names of files containing nroff source text.
|
||||
|
||||
NROFF COMPATIBILITY
|
||||
Cawf accepts the following raw nroff requests:
|
||||
|
||||
.\" .ad .bp .br .ce .de .di .ds
|
||||
.el .fi .fl .ft .i0 .ie .if .in
|
||||
.it .lg .li .ll .ls .na .ne .nf
|
||||
.nr .ns .pl .po .ps .rm .rn .rr
|
||||
.rs .so .sp .ta .ti .tm .tr
|
||||
|
||||
and the following in-text codes:
|
||||
|
||||
\$ \% \* \" \c \f \h \k
|
||||
\n \s \w
|
||||
|
||||
plus the full list of nroff/troff special characters in the original V7
|
||||
troff manual.
|
||||
|
||||
Many restrictions are present; the behavior in general is a subset of
|
||||
nroff's. Of particular note are the following:
|
||||
|
||||
o The fully supported nroff request control character is the period.
|
||||
There is limited support for the non-break, acute accent control
|
||||
character.
|
||||
|
||||
o Point sizes do not exist; .ps is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
o Special vertical spacing - the .vs request included - is ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
o Conditionals cover only the numeric comparisons >, =, <, >= and <= on
|
||||
\n(.$; string comparisons between a macro parameter and a literal; n
|
||||
(always true); and t (always false). Only single line input is
|
||||
accepted from conditionals; multi-line input - e.g., \(anything\) - is
|
||||
not supported.
|
||||
|
||||
o The handling of strings is generally primitive.
|
||||
|
||||
o Horizontal motion via \h must be supplied with a number register
|
||||
interpolation and must be positive - e. g., \w\n(NN, where the value in
|
||||
NN is >= 0.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Purdue University November, 1992 2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CAWF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CAWF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
o The \k function is reliable only after TAB characters, so it is useful
|
||||
only for measuring table positions.
|
||||
|
||||
o The .di request only turns output on and off - any macro name is
|
||||
ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
o Expressions - e. g., .sp - are reasonably general, but the |, &, and :
|
||||
operators do not exist, there must be white space between the end of
|
||||
the nroff function and the beginning of the expression, and \w requires
|
||||
that quote (') be used as the delimiters. \w counts the characters
|
||||
inside the quotes and scales the result in ens, so that, for example,
|
||||
\w'\(bu' equals 4n, and \w'\(bu'/1n equals 4.
|
||||
|
||||
o The only acceptable count for the .it request is one, and it is
|
||||
effective only with man, me or ms macros.
|
||||
|
||||
o The default scaling factor is `v' for the .ne, .sp, and .pl raw nroff
|
||||
requests; it is `u' for .nr; and `n' for .in, .ll, .ls, .po, .ta and
|
||||
.ti. (A different scaling factor may be specified with a trailing
|
||||
character.)
|
||||
|
||||
o Some obsolete or meaningless requests - .i0, .lg and .li - are silently
|
||||
ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
White space at the beginning of lines, and embedded white space within
|
||||
lines is dealt with properly. Sentence terminators at ends of lines are
|
||||
understood to imply extra space afterward in filled lines. Tabs are im-
|
||||
plemented crudely and not exactly, although usually they work as
|
||||
expected. Hyphenation is done only at explicit hyphens, em-dashes, and
|
||||
nroff discretionary hyphens. By default bold and italic characters are
|
||||
emulated with backspacing and overprinting, but the -d and -f options,
|
||||
combined with the contents of the device configuration file, may be used
|
||||
to generate special codes for bold and italic characters. (See the
|
||||
DEVICES section for more information.)
|
||||
|
||||
MAN MACROS
|
||||
The man macro set replicates the full V7 manual macros, plus a few semi-
|
||||
random oddballs. The full list is:
|
||||
|
||||
.AT .B .BI .BR .BY .DE .DS .DT .HP
|
||||
.I
|
||||
.IB .IP .IR .IX .LP .NB .P .PD .PP
|
||||
.RB
|
||||
.RE .RI .RS .SH .SM .SS .TH .TP .UC
|
||||
|
||||
.BY and .NB each take a single string argument (respectively, an indi-
|
||||
cation of authorship and a note about the status of the manual page) and
|
||||
arrange to place it in the page footer. .AT and .IX do nothing.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Purdue University November, 1992 3
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CAWF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CAWF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ME MACROS
|
||||
The me macro subset has been derived from the cawf ms macros by Chet
|
||||
Creider <creider@csd.uwo.ca>. It includes:
|
||||
|
||||
.(l .(q .)l .)q .b .bu .i .ip .lp
|
||||
.np
|
||||
.pp .r .sh .sm .u .uh
|
||||
|
||||
The .(l C and .(l L options are supported. In addition, the .AB, .AE,
|
||||
.AI, .AU, .DA, .ND, .TL and .UX macros have been retained from the ms
|
||||
set, and the .XP macro has been borrowed from the Berkeley additions to
|
||||
the ms macro set.
|
||||
|
||||
MS MACROS
|
||||
The ms macro set is a substantial subset of the V7 manuscript macros.
|
||||
The macros are:
|
||||
|
||||
.AB .AE .AI .AU .B .CD .DA .DE .DS
|
||||
.I
|
||||
.ID .IP .LD .LG .LP .ND .NH .NL .PP
|
||||
.QE
|
||||
.QP .QS .R .RE .RP .RS .SH .SM .TL
|
||||
.TP
|
||||
.UL .UX
|
||||
|
||||
Size changes are recognized but ignored, as are .RP and .ND. .UL just
|
||||
prints its argument in italics. .DS/.DE does not do a keep, nor do any
|
||||
of the other macros that normally imply keeps.
|
||||
|
||||
The DY string variable is available. The PD, PI, and LL number registers
|
||||
exist and can be changed.
|
||||
|
||||
HEADERS AND FOOTERS
|
||||
Cawf allows the placement of text into the five line header and footer
|
||||
sections from the LH, CH, RF, LF, CF, and RF string variables, via the
|
||||
control of the .^b request:
|
||||
|
||||
.^b fh 1 enables header string placement on the first page
|
||||
.^b fh 0 disables header string placement on the first page
|
||||
.^b HF 1 enables header/footer string placement
|
||||
.^b HF 0 disables header/footer string placement
|
||||
|
||||
There are appropriate .^b requests in the distribution man, me and ms
|
||||
macro files. (The me and ms macro files use another .^b request, .^b NH,
|
||||
to enable numbered header processing.)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Purdue University November, 1992 4
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CAWF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CAWF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
OUTPUT
|
||||
The default output format supported by cawf, in its distributed form, is
|
||||
that appropriate to a dumb terminal, using overprinting for italics (via
|
||||
underlining) and bold. The nroff special characters are printed as some
|
||||
vague approximation (it's sometimes extremely vague) to their correct
|
||||
appearance.
|
||||
|
||||
One part of cawf's knowledge of the output device, related to the
|
||||
formation of characters, is established by a device file, which is read
|
||||
before the user's input. The search for it begins in cawf's library
|
||||
directory, under the name term.dev (where term is the value of the TERM
|
||||
environment variable). Failing to find that, cawf searches for dumb.dev.
|
||||
(See the FILES section for a description of the path to cawf's library
|
||||
directory.) The device file uses special internal requests to set up
|
||||
resolution, special characters and more normal nroff functions to set up
|
||||
page length, etc.
|
||||
|
||||
Cawf has limited support for fonts special forms of bold and italic
|
||||
characters. It is provided through the -c config, -ddevice and -ffont
|
||||
options. See the DEVICES section for more information.
|
||||
|
||||
Note the distinction between the device and the output device
|
||||
configuration files. The device file typically defines characters and
|
||||
constant output parameters. The output device configuration file defines
|
||||
font and type face codes. It is usually not necessary to define a
|
||||
separate device file for each device represented in the output device
|
||||
configuration file - the dumb.dev device file will suffice for almost all
|
||||
representations.
|
||||
|
||||
DEVICES
|
||||
Cawf supports primitive output device configuration for font and type
|
||||
face control. One font may be selected for the entire document by
|
||||
directing cawf to issue a font selection control character string at the
|
||||
beginning of the document, and control character strings may be selected
|
||||
for switching between the bold, italic and Roman type faces.
|
||||
|
||||
The -c config, -ddevice and -ffont options direct the font and type face
|
||||
selections.
|
||||
|
||||
The -ddevice option specifies the name of the device. Cawf has three
|
||||
built-in devices - ANSI, NONE and NORMAL. When the ANSI device is
|
||||
selected, cawf issues the ANSI shadow mode control codes, ``ESC [ 7 m'',
|
||||
to represent the bold face; the ANSI underscore control codes, ``ESC [ 4
|
||||
m'', to represent the italic face; and the ANSI control codes, ``ESC [ 0
|
||||
m'', to represent the ROMAN face. No -ffont specification is permitted
|
||||
with the ANSI device.
|
||||
|
||||
When the NONE device is selected, cawf uses no special output codes to
|
||||
represent the type faces. No -ffont specification is permitted with the
|
||||
ANSI device.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Purdue University November, 1992 5
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CAWF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CAWF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The NORMAL output device is the default. When it's selected, cawf
|
||||
overprints each bold character two times, using three issuances of each
|
||||
bold character, separated by backspace characters; it issues an
|
||||
underscore and backspace before each italic character. No -ffont
|
||||
specification is permitted with the ANSI device. The bsfilt(1) filter
|
||||
may be used to further process the backspace codes output for a NORMAL
|
||||
device.
|
||||
|
||||
All other devices named in the -ddevice option must be represented by a
|
||||
stanza in the device configuration file. The device configuration file
|
||||
is usually contained in device.cf in cawf's library directory (see the
|
||||
FILES section for more information). An alternate device configuration
|
||||
file path may be specified with the -cconfig option.
|
||||
|
||||
The DEVICE CONFIGURATION FILE section describes the organization of the
|
||||
device configuration file. It is easy to add devices to the device.cf
|
||||
supplied in the cawf distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
The -ffont option may be used with the -ddevice option, when the
|
||||
appropriate stanza in the device configuration file contains an entry for
|
||||
the named font. The DEVICE CONFIGURATION FILE section describes how
|
||||
fonts are defined in device configuration file stanzas.
|
||||
|
||||
DEVICE CONFIGURATION FILE
|
||||
The device configuration file defines the special character codes
|
||||
necessary to direct output devices to select fonts and to produce bold,
|
||||
italic and Roman type faces.
|
||||
|
||||
The configuration file is usually found in device.cf in cawf's library
|
||||
directory (see the FILES section for more information). It is organized
|
||||
into two main parts - comments and device stanzas. Comments are any
|
||||
lines that begin with the pound sign (`#') character. They are
|
||||
informational only and cawf ignores them. Cawf also ignores empty lines,
|
||||
so they may be used as vertical white space.
|
||||
|
||||
Stanzas name devices and define their font and type face control strings.
|
||||
A stanza begins with the name of the device, starting at the beginning of
|
||||
a line and occupying the entire line. The body of the stanza, defining
|
||||
fonts and type faces, is formed of lines beginning with white space (a
|
||||
TAB or space characters) that directly follow the device name.
|
||||
|
||||
Individual lines of the stanza body contain a key character, followed by
|
||||
a equal sign, followed by the font name (if a font key) and the output
|
||||
device control codes. Cawf issues the font control codes once, at the
|
||||
beginning of output, so only one font may be selected. The type face
|
||||
control codes are issued at each change of type face.
|
||||
|
||||
The key characters are:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Purdue University November, 1992 6
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CAWF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CAWF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
b for bold
|
||||
f for font definition
|
||||
i for italic
|
||||
r for Roman
|
||||
|
||||
The `b', `i' and `r' key codes are followed by an equal sign (`=') and
|
||||
their control code definition. The `f' key code is followed by an equal
|
||||
sign (`='), the font name, another equal sign and the font control code
|
||||
definition.
|
||||
|
||||
Control code definitions may contain any printable ASCII characters.
|
||||
Non-printable characters may be encoded in octal notation with the `\nnn'
|
||||
form or in hexadecimal with the `\xnn' form. The special code, `\E' (or
|
||||
`\e') represents the ESC control character (\033 or \x1b).
|
||||
|
||||
Here's a sample showing the definition for the HP LaserJet III. The
|
||||
stanza name is ``lj3''. All its non-printable characters are ESCs; the
|
||||
first is coded in octal form; the second with '\E'; the rest, in
|
||||
hexadecimal form. TAB is used as the leading white space character for
|
||||
the stanza body lines.
|
||||
|
||||
# HP LaserJet III
|
||||
|
||||
lj3
|
||||
b=\033(s7B
|
||||
i=\E(s1S
|
||||
r=\x1b(s0B\x1b(s0S
|
||||
f=c10=x1b&l0Ox1b(8Ux1b(s0p12h10v0s0b3T
|
||||
f=c12ibm=x1b&l0Ox1b(10Ux1b(s0p10.00h12.0v0s0b3T
|
||||
f=lg12=x1b&l0Ox1b(8Ux1b(s12h12v0s0b6T
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The distribution device.cf file defines the following devices and fonts.
|
||||
|
||||
epson dot matrix printer in Epson FX-86e/FX-800 mode
|
||||
Bold: Double-strike
|
||||
Fonts: none
|
||||
|
||||
ibmppds IBM Personal Printer Data Stream (PPDS) protocol
|
||||
Bold: Double-strike
|
||||
Italic: Underline
|
||||
Fonts: none
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Purdue University November, 1992 7
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CAWF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CAWF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
kxp1124 Panasonic KX-P1124 dot matrix printer in PGM mode
|
||||
Bold: Emphasized
|
||||
Fonts: c10 10 Characters Per Inch (CPI) Courier
|
||||
c12 12 CPI Courier
|
||||
bps10 10 CPI Bold PS
|
||||
bps12 12 CPI Bold PS
|
||||
p10 10 CPI Prestige
|
||||
p12 12 CPI Prestige
|
||||
s10 10 CPI Script
|
||||
s12 12 CPI Script
|
||||
ss10 10 CPI Sans Serif
|
||||
ss12 12 CPI Sans Serif
|
||||
|
||||
kxp1180 Panasonic KX-P1180 dot matrix printer in PGM mode
|
||||
Bold: Emphasized
|
||||
Fonts: c10 10 Characters Per Inch (CPI) Courier
|
||||
c12 12 CPI Courier
|
||||
bps10 10 CPI Bold PS
|
||||
bps12 12 CPI Bold PS
|
||||
p10 10 CPI Prestige
|
||||
p12 12 CPI Prestige
|
||||
ss10 10 CPI Sans Serif
|
||||
ss12 12 CPI Sans Serif
|
||||
|
||||
lj3 HP LaserJet III
|
||||
Fonts: c10 10 point, 12 Characters Per Inch (CPI)
|
||||
Courier
|
||||
c12ibm 12 point, 10 CPI Courier, IBM-PC
|
||||
Symbol Set
|
||||
lg12 12 point, 12 CPI Letter Gothic
|
||||
|
||||
vgamono VGA monochrome monitor for MS-DOS
|
||||
(ANSI.SYS driver required for MS-DOS)
|
||||
Italic: Reverse-video
|
||||
Fonts: none
|
||||
|
||||
FILES
|
||||
Cawf resource files are located in the cawf library directory -
|
||||
C:\SYS\LIB\CAWF, the MS-DOS environment default; or /usr/lib/cawf, the
|
||||
UNIX environment default. These defaults can be overridden by the
|
||||
CAWFLIB environment variable, or changed in the cawflib.h header file.
|
||||
|
||||
common common device-independent initialization
|
||||
device.cf output device configurations
|
||||
*.dev device-specific initialization
|
||||
m*.mac macro package files
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Purdue University November, 1992 8
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CAWF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CAWF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
Unlike nroff, cawf complains whenever it sees unknown requests. All
|
||||
diagnostics appear on the standard error file.
|
||||
|
||||
HISTORY
|
||||
Vic Abell of Purdue University <abe@cc.purdue.edu> derived cawf from awf,
|
||||
``the Amazingly Workable (text) Formatter,'' written by Henry Spencer of
|
||||
the University of Toronto. The Toronto work was a supplement to the C
|
||||
News project. The Purdue effort was aimed at producing a C language
|
||||
version that would run on small systems, particularly MS-DOS ones. The
|
||||
adaptation of the me macros was done by Chet Creider
|
||||
<creider@csd.uwo.ca>. Chet also contributed ideas for device, font and
|
||||
type face support.
|
||||
|
||||
The MS-DOS version of cawf has been compiled with version 2.5 of
|
||||
Microsoft's Quick-C compiler. It runs under the Mortis Kern Systems
|
||||
Toolkit KornShell, ksh(1), and COMMAND.COM.
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
Nroff and troff mavens will have many complaints. Some may even
|
||||
represent bugs and not deliberate omissions.
|
||||
|
||||
Watch out for scaling factors - especially on requests like \w.
|
||||
|
||||
The overprinting required to create bold and italicized characters is
|
||||
tiresome on a slow printer. The bsfilt(1) post-filter from this
|
||||
distribution may be used to alleviate that nuisance by managing the
|
||||
backspacing codes from cawf's NORMAL device output.
|
||||
|
||||
The printing of bold and italic characters is sometimes better handled by
|
||||
special printer codes. Use cawf's -c config, -ddevice and -ffont options
|
||||
to produce special font and device output control codes.
|
||||
|
||||
Cawf has a small amount of built-in code for the man, me and ms macro
|
||||
packages, but none for any others.
|
||||
|
||||
The stacking for the .so request is limited.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
bsfilt(1), colcrt(1), man(7), me(7), ms(7) and nroff(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Purdue University November, 1992 9
|
||||
|
||||
177
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CC.1
Normal file
177
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CC.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CC(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CC(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
cc - C compiler
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
cc [-STOUfcimos] [-w[aos]] [-v[n]] [-Dname]* [-Idir]* [-Ldir]* file+
|
||||
[-lname]*
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-D The flag -Dx[=y] defines a macro x with (optional) value y
|
||||
|
||||
-I -Idir searches dir for include files
|
||||
|
||||
-L -Ldir searches dir for -lname libraries
|
||||
|
||||
-O Optimize the code
|
||||
|
||||
-S Produce an assembly code file, then stop
|
||||
|
||||
-T The flag -Tdir tells cc and as to use dir for temporary files
|
||||
|
||||
-U Undefine a macro
|
||||
|
||||
-E Preprocess to standard output
|
||||
|
||||
-c Compile only. Do not link
|
||||
|
||||
-f Link with floating point emulation library
|
||||
|
||||
-i Use separate I & D space (64K + 64K) ( only)
|
||||
|
||||
-l The flag -lname causes the library libname.a to be linked
|
||||
|
||||
-m Remove unnecessary prototypes after preprocessing ( only)
|
||||
|
||||
-o Put output on file named by next arg
|
||||
|
||||
-s Strip the symbol-table from executable file
|
||||
|
||||
-v Verbose; print pass names
|
||||
|
||||
-vn Verbose; print pass names but do not run them
|
||||
|
||||
-w Suppress warning messages
|
||||
|
||||
-ws Suppress strict messages
|
||||
|
||||
-wa Suppress all warning and strict messages
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CC(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CC(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
-wo Suppress messages about old-style
|
||||
|
||||
-.o Do not link the default run-time start-off
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
cc -c file.c # Compile file.c
|
||||
|
||||
cc -DFOO file.c # Treat the symbol FOO as defined
|
||||
|
||||
cc -wo -o out file.c
|
||||
# Compile old-style code; output to out
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
This is the C compiler. It has eight passes, as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
Program Input Output Operation performed
|
||||
lib/ncpp prog.c prog.i C preprocessor: #include, #define, #ifdef
|
||||
lib/irrel prog.i prog.i Removal of unnecessary prototypes
|
||||
lib/ncem prog.i prog.k Parsing and semantic analysis
|
||||
lib/nopt prog.k prog.m Optimization of the intermediate code
|
||||
lib/ncg prog.m prog.s Code generation
|
||||
bin/as prog.s prog.o Assembly
|
||||
lib/ld prog.o prog.out Linking
|
||||
lib/cv prog.out a.out Conversion to MINIX a.out format
|
||||
|
||||
In the 68000 versions of MINIX , the preprocessor is not called since the
|
||||
front-end contains the preprocessor. This increases compilation speed.
|
||||
|
||||
The main program, cc , forks appropriately to call the passes,
|
||||
transmitting flags and arguments. The -v flag causes the passes to be
|
||||
listed as they are called, and the -vn flag causes the passes to be
|
||||
listed but not called.
|
||||
|
||||
The libraries should be made with aal (which is the same as ar on the
|
||||
68000 versions), and consist of .o files. The internal order of files
|
||||
inside the library is unimportant, but the order in which the libraries
|
||||
are specified is.
|
||||
|
||||
When -T is used, the intermediate files end up in the directory
|
||||
specified. Otherwise, /tmp is used. When available memory is very
|
||||
limited (e.g., a 512K machine), it may be necessary to run chmem to
|
||||
reduce the sizes of the compiler passes that do not fit, typically ncem .
|
||||
|
||||
On the other hand, if the compiler (or, in fact, almost any program)
|
||||
begins acting strange, it is almost always due to its running out of
|
||||
space, either stack space or scratch file space. The relevant pass can
|
||||
be given more stack space using chmem . More space for scratch files can
|
||||
be obtained by removing other files on the device.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CC(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CC(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
If the compiler runs out of memory, it may be necessary to use the -m
|
||||
flag. This causes irrel to be run, which removes unnecessary prototypes
|
||||
and thus frees up extra table space within the compiler. Beware,
|
||||
however, that running this pass may cause strictly conforming programs to
|
||||
become non-conforming and vice versa, so you should only run this pass as
|
||||
a last resort.
|
||||
|
||||
The compiler is derived from the ACK system (Tanenbaum et al.,
|
||||
Communications of the ACM, Sept. 1983), not from the AT&T portable C
|
||||
compiler. It has been shoehorned onto the PC with some loss of
|
||||
performance.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
make(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CDIFF.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CDIFF.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CDIFF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CDIFF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
cdiff - context diff
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
cdiff [-cn] oldfile newfile
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-c Provide n lines of context
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
cdiff old new >f # Write context diff on f
|
||||
|
||||
cdiff -c1 old new >f
|
||||
# Use only 1 line of context
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Cdiff produces a context diff by first running diff and then adding
|
||||
context. Some update programs, like patch, can use context diffs to
|
||||
update files, even in the presence of other, independent changes.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cmp(1), diff(1), patch(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CDPLAY.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CDPLAY.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CDPLAY(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CDPLAY(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
cdplay - play audio compact disks
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
cdplay [ -a]|[-r]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Cdplay is an audio-cdplayer it can be used interactively or non-
|
||||
interactively. With no flags cdplay is used interactively. When used
|
||||
interactively cdplay can be either in non-playing or playing mode. In
|
||||
non-playing mode you can select tracks to be played. In playing mode
|
||||
cdplay shows the track-time, remaining track-time, total-time and
|
||||
remaining total-time. Cdplay assumes the drive to be at /dev/cd0.
|
||||
|
||||
During non-playing mode the following commands are available:
|
||||
|
||||
cursor-up/down
|
||||
browse through the track-list
|
||||
|
||||
spacebar
|
||||
add track to the play-list
|
||||
|
||||
backspace
|
||||
remove a track from the play-list
|
||||
|
||||
s start playing the tracks in the play-list. When the play-list is
|
||||
empty start playing from the current position in the track-list
|
||||
until the end of the cd
|
||||
|
||||
p play the track on the current position in the track-list
|
||||
|
||||
r play all tracks in a random order (shuffle play)
|
||||
|
||||
e exit cdplay
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
During playing mode the following commands are available:
|
||||
|
||||
s stop playing, return to non-playing mode
|
||||
|
||||
spacebar
|
||||
pause/resume current track
|
||||
|
||||
cursor-up/down
|
||||
skip to next/previous track
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CDPLAY(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CDPLAY(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
When one of these options is used cdplay does everything in the
|
||||
background.
|
||||
|
||||
-a Play all tracks, cdplay tells the drive to play all tracks and then
|
||||
it immediately returns to the user
|
||||
|
||||
-r Play all tracks in random order (shuffle play). Cdplay forks of a
|
||||
new process which starts up a track, during that track it sleeps.
|
||||
When the track is finished it wakes up to start the next track and
|
||||
goes to sleep again. The parent process immediately returns to the
|
||||
user.
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
Cdplay does not sense if a cd has changed, so don't switch cd's. If you
|
||||
want to play another cd you have to insert the new cd and start cdplay
|
||||
again.
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Michel R. Prevenier (mrpreve@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CGREP.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CGREP.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CGREP(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CGREP(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
cgrep - grep and display context
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
cgrep [-a n] [-b n] [-f] [-l n] [-n] [-w n] pattern [file] ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-a How many lines to display after the matching line
|
||||
|
||||
-b How many lines to display before the matching line
|
||||
|
||||
-f Suppress file name in the output
|
||||
|
||||
-l Lines are truncated to this length before comparison
|
||||
|
||||
-n Suppress line numbers in the output
|
||||
|
||||
-w Sets window size (same as -a n -b n)
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
cgrep -w 3 hello file1
|
||||
# Print 3 lines of context each way
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Cgrep is a program like grep, except that it also can print a few lines
|
||||
above and/or below the matching lines. It also prints the line numbers
|
||||
of the output.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
grep(1), fgrep(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CHGRP.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CHGRP.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CHGRP(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CHGRP(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
chgrp - change group
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
chgrp [-R] [owner:]group file ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-R Change directory hierarchies
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
chgrp system file1 file2
|
||||
# Make system the group of the files
|
||||
|
||||
chrgp -R other dir1 # Make other the group of all files below dir1
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
The group field (and optionally owner field) of the named files is
|
||||
changed to group and owner . Alternatively, a decimal gid (uid) may be
|
||||
specified instead of a group name. If the -R flag is used, the changes
|
||||
will be applied recursively to all files in named directories. Only the
|
||||
superuser may execute this command to set arbitrary groups. Normal users
|
||||
can only change the group if they own the file, and the group is their
|
||||
own group (Minix), or one of their supplementary groups (Minix-vmd).
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
chown(1), chmod(1), ls(1), chown(2).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CHMEM.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CHMEM.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CHMEM(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CHMEM(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
chmem - change memory allocation
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
chmem [+] [-] [=] amount file
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
chmem =50000 a.out # Give a.out 50K of stack space
|
||||
|
||||
chmem -4000 a.out # Reduce the stack space by 4000 bytes
|
||||
|
||||
chmem +1000 file1 # Increase each stack by 1000 bytes
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
When a program is loaded into memory, it is allocated enough memory for
|
||||
the text and data+bss segments, plus an area for the stack. Data segment
|
||||
growth using malloc , brk , or sbrk eats up stack space from the low end.
|
||||
The amount of stack space to allocate is derived from a field in the
|
||||
executable program's file header. If the combined stack and data segment
|
||||
growth exceeds the stack space allocated, the program will be terminated.
|
||||
|
||||
It is therefore important to set the amount of stack space carefully. If
|
||||
too little is provided, the program may crash. If too much is provided,
|
||||
memory will be wasted, and fewer programs will be able to fit in memory
|
||||
and run simultaneously. MINIX does not swap, so that when memory is
|
||||
full, subsequent attempts to fork will fail. The compiler sets the stack
|
||||
space to the largest possible value (for the Intel CPUs, 64K - text -
|
||||
data). For many programs, this value is far too large. Nonrecursive
|
||||
programs that do not call brk , sbrk , or malloc , and do not have any
|
||||
local arrays usually do not need more than 8K of stack space.
|
||||
|
||||
The chmem command changes the value of the header field that determines
|
||||
the stack allocation, and thus indirectly the total memory required to
|
||||
run the program. The = option sets the stack size to a specific value;
|
||||
the + and - options increment and decrement the current value by the
|
||||
indicated amount. The old and new stack sizes are printed.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
install(1), brk(2).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CHMOD.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CHMOD.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CHMOD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CHMOD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
chmod - change access mode for files
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
chmod [-R] mode file ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-R Change hierarchies recursively
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
chmod 755 file # Owner: rwx Group: r-x Others: r-x
|
||||
|
||||
chmod +x file1 file2
|
||||
# Make file1 and file2 executable
|
||||
|
||||
chmod a-w file # Make file read only
|
||||
|
||||
chmod u+s file # Turn on SETUID for file
|
||||
|
||||
chmod -R o+w dir # Allow writing for all files in dir
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
The given mode is applied to each file in the file list. If the -R flag
|
||||
is present, the files in a directory will be changed as well. The mode
|
||||
can be either absolute or symbolic. Absolute modes are given as an octal
|
||||
number that represents the new file mode. The mode bits are defined as
|
||||
follows:
|
||||
|
||||
4000 Set effective user id on execution to file's owner id
|
||||
2000 Set effective group id on execution to file's group id
|
||||
0400 file is readable by the owner of the file
|
||||
0200 writeable by owner
|
||||
0100 executable by owner
|
||||
0070 same as above, for other users in the same group
|
||||
0007 same as above, for all other users
|
||||
|
||||
Symbolic modes modify the current file mode in a specified way. The form
|
||||
is:
|
||||
|
||||
[who] op permissions { op permissions ...} {, [who] op ... }
|
||||
|
||||
The possibilities for who are u, g, o, and a, standing for user, group,
|
||||
other and all, respectively. If who is omitted, a is assumed, but the
|
||||
current umask is used. The op can be +, -, or =; + turns on the given
|
||||
permissions, - turns them off; = sets the permissions exclusively for the
|
||||
given who. For example g=x sets the group permissions to --x.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CHMOD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CHMOD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The possible permissions are r, w, x; which stand for read, write, and
|
||||
execute; s turns on the set effective user/group id bits. s only makes
|
||||
sense with u and g; o+s is harmless.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
ls(1), chmod(2).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CKSUM.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CKSUM.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CKSUM(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CKSUM(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
cksum - display file checksum and size
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
cksum [file ...]
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
cksum # Display CRC and size of stdin
|
||||
|
||||
cksum *.c # Display CRC and size of .c files
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Cksum calculates and writes to standard output the 32-bits CRC of the
|
||||
input files , or of stdin if no files were specified. The size in bytes
|
||||
of each file will be displayed after a space. The name of each file will
|
||||
be displayed after another space.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
crc(1), sum(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CLR.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CLR.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CLR(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CLR(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
clr - clear the screen
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
clr
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
clr # Clear the screen
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
All text is removed from the screen, resulting in an empty screen with
|
||||
the cursor positioned in the upper left-hand corner.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CMP.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CMP.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CMP(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CMP(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
cmp - compare two files
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
cmp [-ls] file1 file2
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-l Loud mode. Print bytes that differ (in octal)
|
||||
|
||||
-s Silent mode. Print nothing, just return exit status
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
cmp file1 file2 # Tell whether the files are the same
|
||||
|
||||
cmp -l file1 file2 # Print all corresponding bytes that differ
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Two files are compared. If they are identical, exit status 0 is
|
||||
returned. If they differ, exit status 1 is returned. If the files
|
||||
cannot be opened, exit status 2 is returned. If one of the file
|
||||
arguments is -, then stdin is compared to the other file.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
comm(1), diff(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/COMM.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/COMM.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
COMM(1) Minix Programmer's Manual COMM(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
comm - print lines common to two sorted files
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
comm [-123] file1 file2
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-1 Suppress column 1 (lines present only in file1)
|
||||
|
||||
-2 Suppress column 2 (lines present only in file2)
|
||||
|
||||
-3 Suppress column 3 (lines present in both files)
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
comm file1 file2 # Print all three columns
|
||||
|
||||
comm -12 file1 file2
|
||||
# Print only lines common to both files
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Two sorted files are read and compared. A three column listing is
|
||||
produced. Files only in file1 are in column 1; files only in file2 are
|
||||
in column 2; files common to both files are in column 3. The file name -
|
||||
means stdin.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cmp(1), diff(1), sort(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/COMPRESS.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/COMPRESS.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
COMPRESS(1) Minix Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
compress, uncompress, zcat - compress a file using modified Lempel-Ziv
|
||||
coding
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
compress [-cdfv] [file] ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-c Put output on stdout instead of on file.Z
|
||||
|
||||
-d Decompress instead of compress
|
||||
|
||||
-f Force output even if there is no saving
|
||||
|
||||
-v Verbose mode
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
compress <infile >outfile
|
||||
# Compress 1 file
|
||||
|
||||
compress x y z # Compress 3 files to x.Z, y.Z, and z.Z
|
||||
|
||||
compress -d file.Z # Decompress file.Z to file
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
The listed files (or stdin, if none are given) are compressed using the
|
||||
Ziv-Lempel algorithm. If the output is smaller than the input, the
|
||||
output is put on file.Z or stdout if no files are listed. If compress is
|
||||
linked to uncompress, the latter is the same as giving the -d flag.
|
||||
Similarly, a link to zcat decompresses to stdout. The MINIX version of
|
||||
compress uses 13-bit compression. This means that when compressing files
|
||||
on other systems for transmission to MINIX, be sure that only 13-bit
|
||||
compression is used. On many systems, the default is 16-bit (too big).
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
tar(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CP.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CP.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CP(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CP(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
cp, cpdir - file copy
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
cp [-pifsmrRvx] file1 file2
|
||||
cp [-pifsrRvx] file ... directory
|
||||
cpdir [-ifvx] file1 file2
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-p Preserve full mode, uid, gid and times
|
||||
|
||||
-i Ask before removing existing file
|
||||
|
||||
-f Forced remove existing file
|
||||
|
||||
-s Make similar, copy some attributes
|
||||
|
||||
-m Merge trees, disable the into-a-directory trick
|
||||
|
||||
-r Copy directory trees with link structure, etc. intact
|
||||
|
||||
-R Copy directory trees and treat special files as ordinary
|
||||
|
||||
-v Display what cp is doing
|
||||
|
||||
-x Do not cross device boundaries
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
cp oldfile newfile # Copy oldfile to newfile
|
||||
|
||||
cp -R dir1 dir2 # Copy a directory tree
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Cp copies one file to another, or copies one or more files to a
|
||||
directory. Special files are normally opened and read, unless -r is
|
||||
used. -r also copies the link structure, something -R doesn't care
|
||||
about. The -s option differs from -p that it only copies the times if
|
||||
the target file already exists. A normal copy only copies the mode of
|
||||
the file, with the file creation mask applied. Set-uid bits are cleared
|
||||
if the owner cannot be set. (The -s flag does not patronize you by
|
||||
clearing bits. Alas -s and -r are nonstandard.)
|
||||
|
||||
Cpdir is a convenient synonym for cp -psmr to make a precise copy of a
|
||||
directory tree.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CP(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CP(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cat(1), mkdir(1), rmdir(1), ln(1), rm(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CRC.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CRC.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CRC(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CRC(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
crc - print the checksum of the file data
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
crc file ...
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
crc *.c # Print checksums of all the C programs
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
The checksum of each argument is computed and printed, along with the
|
||||
file length and its name, one file per line. This program is useful for
|
||||
seeing if a file transmitted to another machine has arrived correctly.
|
||||
It is conceptually similar to sum, except that it uses a stronger
|
||||
checksum algorithm and also prints the length.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cksum(1), sum(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CTAGS.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CTAGS.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CTAGS(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CTAGS(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
ctags - Generates "tags" and (optionally) "refs" files
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
ctags [-stvra] filesnames...
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
ctags generates the "tags" and "refs" files from a group of C source
|
||||
files. The "tags" file is used by Elvis' ":tag" command, control-]
|
||||
command, and -t option. The "refs" file is sometimes used by the ref(1)
|
||||
program.
|
||||
|
||||
Each C source file is scanned for #define statements and global function
|
||||
definitions. The name of the macro or function becomes the name of a
|
||||
tag. For each tag, a line is added to the "tags" file which contains:
|
||||
- the name of the tag
|
||||
- a tab character
|
||||
- the name of the file containing the tag
|
||||
- a tab character
|
||||
- a way to find the particular line within the file.
|
||||
|
||||
The filenames list will typically be the names of all C source files in
|
||||
the current directory, like this:
|
||||
$ ctags -stv *.[ch]
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-t Include typedefs. A tag will be generated for each user-defined
|
||||
type. Also tags will be generated for struct and enum names. Types
|
||||
are considered to be global if they are defined in a header file,
|
||||
and static if they are defined in a C source file.
|
||||
|
||||
-v Include variable declarations. A tag will be generated for each
|
||||
variable, except for those that are declared inside the body of a
|
||||
function.
|
||||
|
||||
-s Include static tags. Ctags will normally put global tags in the
|
||||
"tags" file, and silently ignore the static tags. This flag causes
|
||||
both global and static tags to be added. The name of a static tag
|
||||
is generated by prefixing the name of the declared item with the
|
||||
name of the file where it is defined, with a colon in between. For
|
||||
example, "static foo(){}" in "bar.c" results in a tag named
|
||||
"bar.c:foo".
|
||||
|
||||
-r This causes ctags to generate both "tags" and "refs". Without -r,
|
||||
it would only generate "tags".
|
||||
|
||||
-a Append to "tags", and maybe "refs". Normally, ctags overwrites
|
||||
these files each time it is invoked. This flag is useful when you
|
||||
have to many files in the current directory for you to list them on
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CTAGS(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CTAGS(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
a single command-line; it allows you to split the arguments among
|
||||
several invocations.
|
||||
|
||||
FILES
|
||||
|
||||
tags A cross-reference that lists each tag name, the name of the source
|
||||
file that contains it, and a way to locate a particular line in the
|
||||
source file.
|
||||
|
||||
refs The "refs" file contains the definitions for each tag in the "tags"
|
||||
file, and very little else. This file can be useful, for example,
|
||||
when licensing restrictions prevent you from making the source code
|
||||
to the standard C library readable by everybody, but you still
|
||||
everybody to know what arguments the library functions need.
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
|
||||
ctags is sensitive to indenting and line breaks. Consequently, it might
|
||||
not discover all of the tags in a file that is formatted in an unusual
|
||||
way.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
elvis(1), refs(1)
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Steve Kirkendall
|
||||
kirkenda@cs.pdx.edu
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CUT.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/CUT.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CUT(1) Minix Programmer's Manual CUT(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
cut - select out columns of a file
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
cut [ -b | -c] list [file...]
|
||||
cut -f list [-d delim] [ -s]
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-b Cut specified bytes
|
||||
|
||||
-c Select out specific characters
|
||||
|
||||
-d Change the column delimiter to delim
|
||||
|
||||
-f Select out specific fields that are separated by the
|
||||
|
||||
-i Runs of delimiters count as one
|
||||
|
||||
-s Suppres lines with no delimiter characters, when used
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
cut -f 2 file # Extract field 2
|
||||
|
||||
cut -c 1-2,5 file # Extract character columns 1, 2, and 5
|
||||
|
||||
cut -c 1-5,7- file # Extract all columns except 6
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
[file...]" delimiter character ( see delim)" with the -f option. Lines
|
||||
with no delimiters are passwd through untouched"
|
||||
|
||||
Cut extracts one or more fields or columns from a file and writes them on
|
||||
standard output. If the -f flag is used, the fields are separated by a
|
||||
delimiter character, normally a tab, but can be changed using the -d
|
||||
flag. If the -c flag is used, specific columns can be specified. The
|
||||
list can be comma or BLANK separated. The -f and -c flags are mutually
|
||||
exclusive. Note: The POSIX1003.2 standard requires the option -b to cut
|
||||
out specific bytes in a file. It is intended for systems with multi byte
|
||||
characters (e.g. kanji), since MINIX uses only one byte characters, this
|
||||
option is equivalent to -c. For the same reason, the option -n has no
|
||||
effect and is not listed in this manual page.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
sed(1), awk(9).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DATE.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DATE.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DATE(1) Minix Programmer's Manual DATE(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
date - print or set the date and time
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
date [-qsu] [[MMDDYY]hhmm[ss]] [+format]
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-q Read the date from stdin
|
||||
|
||||
-s Set the time (implicit for -q or a date string)
|
||||
|
||||
-u Print the date as GMT
|
||||
|
||||
-t Use this number of seconds instead of current time
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
date # Print the date and time
|
||||
|
||||
date 0221921610 # Set date to Feb 21, 1992 at 4:10 p.m.
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
With the -q flag or a numeric argument, date sets the GMT time and date.
|
||||
MMDDYY refers to the month, day, and year; hhmmss refers to the hour,
|
||||
minute and second. Each of the six fields must be exactly two digits, no
|
||||
more and no less. date always display the date and time, with the
|
||||
default format for the system. The -u flag request GMT time instead of
|
||||
local time. A format may be specified with a + followed by a printf-like
|
||||
string with the following options:
|
||||
|
||||
%% % character
|
||||
%A Name of the day
|
||||
%B Name of the month
|
||||
%D mm/dd/yy
|
||||
%H Decimal hour on 2 digits
|
||||
%I Decimal hour modulo 12 on 2 digits
|
||||
%M Decimal minute on 2 digits
|
||||
%S Decimal seconds on 2 digits
|
||||
%T HH:MM:SS
|
||||
%U Decimal week number, Sunday being first day of week
|
||||
%W Decimal week number, Monday being first day of week
|
||||
%X Same as %T
|
||||
%Y Decimal year on 4 digits
|
||||
%Z Time Zone (if any)
|
||||
%a Abbreviated name of the day
|
||||
%b Abbreviated name of the month
|
||||
%c Appropriate date & time (default format)
|
||||
%d Decimal day of the month on 2 digits
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DATE(1) Minix Programmer's Manual DATE(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
%e Same as %d, but a space replaces leading 0
|
||||
%h Same as %b
|
||||
%j Decimal dey of the year on 3 digits
|
||||
%m Decimal month on 2 digits
|
||||
%n Newline character
|
||||
%p AM or PM
|
||||
%r 12-hour clock time with AM/PM
|
||||
%s Number of seconds since the epoch
|
||||
%t Tab character
|
||||
%w Decimal day of the week (0=Sunday)
|
||||
%x Same as %D
|
||||
%y Decimal year on 2 digits
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
time(2), ctime(3), readclock(8).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DD.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DD.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual DD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
dd - disk dumper
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
dd [option = value] ...
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
dd if=/dev/fd0 of=/dev/fd1
|
||||
# Copy disk 0 to disk 1
|
||||
|
||||
dd if=x of=y bs=1w skip=4
|
||||
# Copy x to y, skipping 4 words
|
||||
|
||||
dd if=x of=y count=3
|
||||
# Copy three 512-byte blocks
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
This command is intended for copying partial files. The block size, skip
|
||||
count, and number of blocks to copy can be specified. The options are:
|
||||
|
||||
if = file - Input file (default is stdin)
|
||||
of = file - Output file (default is standard output)
|
||||
ibs = n - Input block size (default 512 bytes)
|
||||
obs = n - Output block size (default is 512 bytes)
|
||||
bs = n - Block size; sets ibs and obs (default is 512 bytes)
|
||||
skip = n - Skip n input blocks before reading
|
||||
seek = n - Skip n output blocks before writing
|
||||
count = n - Copy only n input blocks
|
||||
conv = lcase - Convert upper case letters to lower case
|
||||
conv = ucase - Convert lower case letters to upper case
|
||||
conv = swab - Swap every pair of bytes
|
||||
conv = noerror - Ignore errors and just keep going
|
||||
conv = silent - Suppress statistics (Minix specific flag)
|
||||
|
||||
Where sizes are expected, they are in bytes. However, the letters w, b,
|
||||
or k may be appended to the number to indicate words (2 bytes), blocks
|
||||
(512 bytes), or K (1024 bytes), respectively. When dd is finished, it
|
||||
reports the number of full and partial blocks read and written.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
vol(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DF.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DF.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual DF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
df - report on free disk space and i-nodes
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
df special ...
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
df /dev/ram # Report on free RAM disk space
|
||||
|
||||
df /dev/fd0 /dev/fd1
|
||||
# Report on diskette space
|
||||
|
||||
df # Report on all mounted devices
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
The amount of disk space and number of i-nodes, both free and used is
|
||||
reported. If no argument is given, df reports on the root device and all
|
||||
mounted file systems.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
du(1), fstab(5).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DHRYSTON.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DHRYSTON.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DHRYSTONE(1) Minix Programmer's Manual DHRYSTONE(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
dhrystone - integer benchmark
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
dhrystone
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
dhrystone # Run the dhrystone benchmark
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Many years ago, a floating-point benchmark called whetstone was popular
|
||||
for benchmarking FORTRAN programs. Nowadays, an integer benchmark called
|
||||
dhrystone is widely used for benchmarking UNIX systems. This is it. Be
|
||||
warned, however, that dhrystone is entirely CPU bound, and goes
|
||||
blindingly fast on machines with high-speed caches. Although this is a
|
||||
good measure for programs that spend most of their time in some inner
|
||||
loop, it is a poor benchmark for I/O bound applications.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DIFF.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DIFF.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DIFF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual DIFF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
diff - print differences between two files
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
diff [-c | -e | -C n] [-br]file1 file2
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-C n Produce output that contains n lines of context
|
||||
|
||||
-b Ignore white space when comparing
|
||||
|
||||
-c Produce output that contains three lines of context
|
||||
|
||||
-e Produce an ed-script to convert file1 into file2
|
||||
|
||||
-r Apply diff recursively to files and directories of
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
diff file1 file2 # Print differences between 2 files
|
||||
|
||||
diff -C 0 file1 file2
|
||||
# Same as above
|
||||
|
||||
diff -C 3 file1 file2
|
||||
# Output three lines of context with every
|
||||
|
||||
diff -c file1 file2 # Same
|
||||
|
||||
diff /etc /dev # Compares recursively the directories /etc and /dev
|
||||
|
||||
diff passwd /etc # Compares ./passwd to /etc/passwd
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
the same name, when file1 and file2 are both directories" difference
|
||||
encountered"
|
||||
|
||||
Diff compares two files and generates a list of lines telling how the two
|
||||
files differ. Lines may not be longer than 128 characters. If the two
|
||||
arguments on the command line are both directories, diff recursively
|
||||
steps through all subdirectories comparing files of the same name. If a
|
||||
file name is found only in one directory, a diagnostic message is written
|
||||
to stdout. A file that is of either block special, character special or
|
||||
FIFO special type, cannot be compared to any other file. On the other
|
||||
hand, if there is one directory and one file given on the command line,
|
||||
diff tries to compare the file with the same name as file in the
|
||||
directory directory.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DIFF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual DIFF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cdiff(1), cmp(1), comm(1), patch(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DISKCHEC.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DISKCHEC.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DISKCHECK(1) Minix Programmer's Manual DISKCHECK(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
diskcheck - check a disk for bad sectors
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
diskcheck device start count
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
diskcheck /dev/at0 0 1200
|
||||
# Check 1.2 MB diskette
|
||||
|
||||
diskcheck /dev/at0 100 50
|
||||
# Check blocks 100 to 149
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Diskcheck checks a disk for bad sectors by reading in each sector,
|
||||
writing a known bit pattern onto it, reading it back in and comparing
|
||||
with what was written. This check is then done a second time. Bad
|
||||
sectors are reported. After each sector is tested, the original sector
|
||||
is restored. Only use this program on unmounted partitions. Killing it
|
||||
part way through may result in lost data.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
format(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DOSDIR.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DOSDIR.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DOSDIR(1) Minix Programmer's Manual DOSDIR(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
dosdir - list an MS-DOS directory [IBM]
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
dosdir [-lr] drive
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-l Long listing
|
||||
|
||||
-r Recursively descend and print subdirectories
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
dosdir -l A # List root directory on drive A
|
||||
|
||||
dosdir -r C x/y # Recursively list directory x/y
|
||||
|
||||
dosdir -r fd1 # List device /dev/fd1
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Dosdir reads standard IBM PC diskettes or hard disk partitions in MS-DOS
|
||||
format and lists their contents on standard output. Directory names
|
||||
should contain slashes to separate components, even though MS-DOS uses
|
||||
backslashes. The names dosdir , dosread , and doswrite are all links to
|
||||
the same program. The program sees which function to perform by seeing
|
||||
how it was called. A drive code of A causes the program to use
|
||||
/dev/dosA, for example, a link to /dev/fd0. Similarly, to have hard disk
|
||||
partition 1 be DOS drive C, /dev/dosC could be a link to /dev/hd1, and so
|
||||
on for other drive codes. A normal device name may also be used instead
|
||||
of a drive code.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DOSREAD.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DOSREAD.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DOSREAD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual DOSREAD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
dosread - read a file from an MS-DOS diskette [IBM]
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
dosread [-a] drive file
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-a ASCII file
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
dosread C g/adv >adv
|
||||
# Read file g/adv from hard disk
|
||||
|
||||
dosread -a A prog.c >x
|
||||
# Read ASCII file prog.c from drive A
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Dosread reads one MS-DOS file and writes it on standard output. The file
|
||||
name must use slash, not backslash as a separator. ASCII files have the
|
||||
final CTRL-Z stripped, and carriage return plus line feed are mapped to
|
||||
line feed only, the usual MINIX convention. See dosdir on the use of
|
||||
single letter drive codes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DOSWRITE.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DOSWRITE.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DOSWRITE(1) Minix Programmer's Manual DOSWRITE(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
doswrite - write a file onto an MS-DOS diskette [IBM]
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
doswrite [-a] drive file
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-a ASCII file
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
doswrite A x/y <z # Write file z to disk as x/y
|
||||
|
||||
doswrite -a B f # Copy stdin to MS-DOS file f
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Doswrite writes its stdin to an MS-DOS file. The diskette or partition
|
||||
must be formatted and have an MS-DOS file system already in place,
|
||||
including all the directories leading up to the file. See dosdir on the
|
||||
use of single letter drive codes.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DU.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/DU.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DU(1) Minix Programmer's Manual DU(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
du - print disk usage
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
du [-as] [-l n] dir ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-a Give usage for all files
|
||||
|
||||
-l List up to n levels of subdirectories
|
||||
|
||||
-s Summary only
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
du dir # List disk space used by files in dir
|
||||
|
||||
du -s dir1 dir2 # Give summaries only
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Du examines one or more directories and prints the amount of space
|
||||
occupied by the files in those directories and their subdirectories.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
df(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ECHO.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ECHO.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ECHO(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ECHO(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
echo - print the arguments
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
echo [-n] argument ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-n No line feed is output when done
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
echo Start Phase 1 # 'Start Phase 1' is printed
|
||||
|
||||
echo -n Hello # 'Hello' is printed without a line feed
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Echo writes its arguments to standard output. They are separated by
|
||||
blanks and terminated with a line feed unless -n is present. This
|
||||
command is used mostly in shell scripts.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
sh(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ED.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ED.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ED(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ED(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
ed - editor
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
ed file
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
- Suppress line/byte count messages (for in scripts)
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
ed prog.c # Edit prog.c
|
||||
|
||||
echo '1,$p' | ed - file
|
||||
# Odd way to write 'cat file'
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Ed is functionally equivalent to the standard V7 editor, ed. It supports
|
||||
the following commands:
|
||||
|
||||
(.) a: append
|
||||
(.,.) c: change
|
||||
(.,.) d: delete
|
||||
e: edit new file"
|
||||
f: print name of edited file"
|
||||
(1,$) g: global command
|
||||
(.) i: insert
|
||||
(.,.+1) j: join lines together
|
||||
(.) k: mark
|
||||
(.) l: print with special characters in octal
|
||||
(.,.) m: move
|
||||
(.,.) p: print
|
||||
q: quit editor"
|
||||
(.) r: read in new file
|
||||
(.,.) s: substitute
|
||||
(1,$) v: like g, except select lines that do not match
|
||||
(1,$) w: write out edited file
|
||||
Many of the commands can take one or two addresses, as indicated above.
|
||||
The defaults are shown in parentheses. Thus a appends to the current
|
||||
line, and g works on the whole file as default. The dot refers to the
|
||||
current line. Below is a sample editing session with comments given
|
||||
following the # symbol.
|
||||
|
||||
ed prog.c # Edit prog.c
|
||||
3,20p # Print lines 3 through 20
|
||||
/whole/ # Find next occurence of whole
|
||||
s/whole/while/ # Replace whole by while
|
||||
g/Buf/s//BUF/g # Replace Buf by BUF everywhere
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ED(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ED(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
w # Write the file back
|
||||
q # Exit the editor
|
||||
Ed is provided for its sentimental value. If you want a line-oriented
|
||||
editor, try ex. If you want a good editor, use elle, elvis, or mined.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
elvis(1), elle(9), mined(9).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/EJECT.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/EJECT.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EJECT(1) Minix Programmer's Manual EJECT(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
eject - eject removable media
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
eject device
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Eject tells a device to eject removable media, usually a floppy or CD-
|
||||
ROM. Eject invokes the DIOCEJECT ioctl on the device. The media will
|
||||
then be ejected, or allowed to be removed. The call will fail if the
|
||||
device is still in use.
|
||||
|
||||
Tapes can't be unloaded with this command, use mt offline instead.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
mt(1), hd(4), sd(4).
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
177
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ELVIS.1
Normal file
177
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ELVIS.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ELVIS(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ELVIS(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
elvis, ex, vi - The editor
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
elvis [flags] [+cmd] [files...]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Elvis is a text editor which emulates vi/ex.
|
||||
|
||||
On systems which pass the program name as an argument, such as Unix and
|
||||
Minix, you may also install elvis under the names "ex", "vi", "view", and
|
||||
"input". These extra names would normally be links to elvis; see the
|
||||
"ln" shell command.
|
||||
|
||||
When elvis is invoked as "vi", it behaves exactly as though it was
|
||||
invoked as "elvis". However, if you invoke elvis as "view", then the
|
||||
readonly option is set as though you had given it the "-R" flag. If you
|
||||
invoke elvis as "ex", then elvis will start up in the colon command mode
|
||||
instead of the visual command mode, as though you had given it the "-e"
|
||||
flag. If you invoke elvis as "input" or "edit", then elvis will start up
|
||||
in input mode, as though the "-i" flag was given.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-r To the real vi, this flag means that a previous edit should be
|
||||
recovered. Elvis, though, has a separate program, called elvrec(1),
|
||||
for recovering files. When you invoke elvis with -r, elvis will
|
||||
tell you to run elvrec.
|
||||
|
||||
-R This sets the "readonly" option, so you won't accidentally overwrite
|
||||
a file.
|
||||
|
||||
-t tag
|
||||
This causes elvis to start editing at the given tag.
|
||||
|
||||
-m [file]
|
||||
Elvis will search through file for something that looks like an
|
||||
error message from a compiler. It will then begin editing the
|
||||
source file that caused the error, with the cursor sitting on the
|
||||
line where the error was detected. If you don't explicitly name a
|
||||
file, then "errlist" is assumed.
|
||||
|
||||
-e Elvis will start up in colon command mode.
|
||||
|
||||
-v Elvis will start up in visual command mode.
|
||||
|
||||
-i Elvis will start up in input mode.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ELVIS(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ELVIS(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
-w winsize
|
||||
Sets the "window" option's value to winsize.
|
||||
|
||||
+command or -c command
|
||||
If you use the +command parameter, then after the first file is
|
||||
loaded command is executed as an EX command. A typical example
|
||||
would be "elvis +237 foo", which would cause elvis to start editing
|
||||
foo and then move directly to line 237. The "-c command" variant
|
||||
was added for UNIX SysV compatibility.
|
||||
|
||||
FILES
|
||||
|
||||
/tmp/elv*
|
||||
During editing, elvis stores text in a temporary file. For UNIX,
|
||||
this file will usually be stored in the /tmp directory, and the
|
||||
first three characters will be "elv". For other systems, the
|
||||
temporary files may be stored someplace else; see the version-
|
||||
specific section of the documentation.
|
||||
|
||||
tags This is the database used by the :tags command and the -t option.
|
||||
It is usually created by the ctags(1) program.
|
||||
|
||||
.exrc or elvis.rc
|
||||
On UNIX-like systems, a file called ".exrc" in your home directory
|
||||
is executed as a series of ex commands. A file by the same name may
|
||||
be executed in the current directory, too. On non-UNIX systems,
|
||||
".exrc" is usually an invalid file name; there, the initialization
|
||||
file is called "elvis.rc" instead.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
ctags(1), ref(1), virec(1), elvis(9).
|
||||
|
||||
Elvis - A Clone of Vi/Ex, the complete elvis documentation.
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
There is no LISP support. Certain other features are missing, too.
|
||||
|
||||
Auto-indent mode is not quite compatible with the real vi. Among other
|
||||
things, 0^D and ^^D don't do what you might expect.
|
||||
|
||||
Long lines are displayed differently. The real vi wraps long lines onto
|
||||
multiple rows of the screen, but elvis scrolls sideways.
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Steve Kirkendall
|
||||
kirkenda@cs.pdx.edu
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ELVIS(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ELVIS(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Many other people have worked to port elvis to various operating systems.
|
||||
To see who deserves credit, run the :version command from within elvis,
|
||||
or look in the system-specific section of the complete documentation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ELVREC.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ELVREC.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ELVREC(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ELVREC(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
elvrec - Recover the modified version of a file after a crash
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
elvrec [preservedfile [newfile]]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
If you're editing a file when elvis dies, the system crashes, or power
|
||||
fails, the most recent version of your text will be preserved. The
|
||||
preserved text is stored in a special directory; it does NOT overwrite
|
||||
your text file automatically.
|
||||
|
||||
The elvrec program locates the preserved version of a given file, and
|
||||
writes it over the top of your text file -- or to a new file, if you
|
||||
prefer. The recovered file will have nearly all of your changes.
|
||||
|
||||
To see a list of all recoverable files, run elvrec with no arguments.
|
||||
|
||||
FILES
|
||||
|
||||
/usr/preserve/p*
|
||||
The text that was preserved when elvis died.
|
||||
|
||||
/usr/preserve/Index
|
||||
A text file which lists the names of all preserved files, and the
|
||||
names of the /usr/preserve/p* files which contain their preserved
|
||||
text.
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
|
||||
elvrec is very picky about filenames. You must tell it to recover the
|
||||
file using exactly the same pathname as when you were editing it. The
|
||||
simplest way to do this is to go into the same directory that you were
|
||||
editing, and invoke elvrec with the same filename as elvis. If that
|
||||
doesn't work, then try running elvrec with no arguments, to see exactly
|
||||
which pathname it is using for the desired file.
|
||||
|
||||
Due to the permissions on the /usr/preserve directory, on UNIX systems
|
||||
elvrec must be run as superuser. This is accomplished by making the
|
||||
elvrec executable be owned by "root" and setting its "set user id" bit.
|
||||
|
||||
If you're editing a nameless buffer when elvis dies, then elvrec will
|
||||
pretend that the file was named "foo".
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Steve Kirkendall
|
||||
kirkenda@cs.pdx.edu
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/EXPAND.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/EXPAND.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EXPAND(1) Minix Programmer's Manual EXPAND(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
expand - convert tabs to spaces
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
expand [-t1,t2, ...] [file]
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-t Tab stop positions
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
expand -16,32,48,64 # Expand stdin with tabs every 16 columns
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Expand replaces tabs in the named files with the equivalent numbers of
|
||||
spaces. If no files are listed, stdin is given. If only one tab is
|
||||
given, the rest are multiples of it. The default is a tab every 8
|
||||
spaces.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
unexpand(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/EXPR.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/EXPR.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EXPR(1) Minix Programmer's Manual EXPR(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
expr - evaluate experession
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
expr arg ...
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
x=`expr $x + 1` # Add 1 to shell variable x
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Expr computes the value of its argument and writes the result on standard
|
||||
output. The valid operators, in order of increasing precedence, are
|
||||
listed below. Operators grouped by {...} have the same precedence. The
|
||||
operators are: |, &, {<, <=, ==, !=, >=, >}, {+, -}, *, /, %, and :.
|
||||
Parentheses are permitted.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
sh(1), test(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FACTOR.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FACTOR.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FACTOR(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FACTOR(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
factor - factor an integer less than 2**31
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
factor number
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
factor 450180 # Print the prime factors of 450180
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Factor prints the prime factors of its argument in increasing order.
|
||||
Each factor is printed as many times as it appears in the number.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FGREP.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FGREP.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FGREP(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FGREP(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
fgrep - fixed grep
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
fgrep [-cfhlnsv] [string_file] [string] [file] ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-c Count matching lines and only print count, not the lines
|
||||
|
||||
-f Take strings from file named in following argument
|
||||
|
||||
-h Omit file headers from printout
|
||||
|
||||
-l List file names once only
|
||||
|
||||
-n Each line is preceded by its line number
|
||||
|
||||
-s Status only, no output
|
||||
|
||||
-v Print only lines not matching
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
fgrep % prog.c # Print lines containing % sign
|
||||
|
||||
fgrep -f pattern prog.c
|
||||
# Take strings from pattern
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Fgrep is essentially the same as grep, except that it only searches for
|
||||
lines containing literal strings (no wildcard characters). The pattern
|
||||
may consist of several lines with one string to search on each line.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cgrep(1), grep(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FILE.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FILE.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FILE(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FILE(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
file - make a guess as to a file's type based on contents
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
file name ...
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
file a.out ar.h # Guess at types
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
File reads the first block of a file and tries to make an intelligent
|
||||
guess about what kind of file it is. It understands about archives, C
|
||||
source programs, executable binaries, shell scripts, and English text.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FIND.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FIND.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FIND(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FIND(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
find - find files meeting a given condition
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
find directory expression
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
find / -name a.out -print
|
||||
# Print all a.out paths
|
||||
|
||||
find /usr/ast ! -newer f -ok rm {} \\;
|
||||
# Ask before removing
|
||||
|
||||
find /usr -size +20 -exec mv {} /big \\;
|
||||
# move files > 20 blks
|
||||
|
||||
find / ( -name a.out -o -name '*.o' ) -exec rm {}\\;
|
||||
# 2 conds
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Find descends the file tree starting at the given directory checking each
|
||||
file in that directory and its subdirectories against a predicate. If
|
||||
the predicate is true, an action is taken. The predicates may be
|
||||
connected by -a (Boolean and), -o (Boolean or) and ! (Boolean negation).
|
||||
Each predicate is true under the conditions specified below. The integer
|
||||
n may also be +n to mean any value greater than n, -n to mean any value
|
||||
less than n, or just n for exactly n.
|
||||
|
||||
-name s true if current filename is s (include shell wild cards)
|
||||
-size n true if file size is n blocks
|
||||
-inum n true if the current file's i-node number is n
|
||||
-mtime n true if modification time relative to today (in days) is n
|
||||
-links n true if the number of links to the file is n
|
||||
-newer f true if the file is newer than f
|
||||
-perm n true if the file's permission bits = n (n is in octal)
|
||||
-user u true if the uid = u (a numerical value, not a login name)
|
||||
-group g true if the gid = g (a numerical value, not a group name)
|
||||
-type x where x is bcdfug (block, char, dir, regular file, setuid,
|
||||
setgid)
|
||||
-xdev do not cross devices to search mounted file systems
|
||||
|
||||
Following the expression can be one of the following, telling what to do
|
||||
when a file is found:
|
||||
|
||||
-print print the file name on standard output
|
||||
-exec execute a MINIX command, {} stands for the file name
|
||||
-ok prompts before executing the command
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FIND(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FIND(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
test(1), xargs(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FINGER.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FINGER.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FINGER(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FINGER(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
finger - user information lookup program
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
finger [ options ] name ...
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
By default finger lists the login name, full name, terminal name and
|
||||
write status (as a `*' before the terminal name if write permission is
|
||||
denied), idle time, login time, and office location and phone number (if
|
||||
they are known) for each current UNIX user. (Idle time is minutes if it
|
||||
is a single integer, hours and minutes if a ':' is present, or days and
|
||||
hours if a 'd' is present.)
|
||||
|
||||
A longer format also exists and is used by finger whenever a list of
|
||||
people's names is given. (Account names as well as first and last names
|
||||
of users are accepted.) This format is multi-line, and includes all the
|
||||
information described above as well as the user's home directory and
|
||||
login shell, any plan which the person has placed in the file .plan in
|
||||
their home directory, and the project on which they are working from the
|
||||
file .project also in the home directory.
|
||||
|
||||
Finger may be used to lookup users on a remote machine. The format is to
|
||||
specify the user as ``user@host.'' If the user name is left off, the
|
||||
standard format listing is provided on the remote machine.
|
||||
|
||||
Finger options include:
|
||||
|
||||
-m Match arguments only on user name.
|
||||
|
||||
-l Force long output format.
|
||||
|
||||
-p Suppress printing of the .plan files
|
||||
|
||||
-s Force short output format.
|
||||
|
||||
FILES
|
||||
/etc/utmp who file
|
||||
/etc/passwd for users names, offices, ...
|
||||
/usr/adm/lastlog last login times
|
||||
~/.plan plans
|
||||
~/.project projects
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
chfn(1), w(1), who(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
4BSD May 10, 1986 1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FINGER(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FINGER(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Earl T. Cohen
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
Only the first line of the .project file is printed.
|
||||
|
||||
There is no way to pass arguments to the remote machine as finger uses an
|
||||
internet standard port.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
4BSD May 10, 1986 2
|
||||
|
||||
590
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FLEX.1
Normal file
590
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FLEX.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,590 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FLEX(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FLEX(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
flex, lex - fast lexical analyzer generator
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
flex [-bcdfinpstvFILT8 -C[efmF] -Sskeleton] [filename ...]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
flex is a tool for generating scanners: programs which recognized lexical
|
||||
patterns in text. flex reads the given input files, or its standard
|
||||
input if no file names are given, for a description of a scanner to
|
||||
generate. The description is in the form of pairs of regular expressions
|
||||
and C code, called rules. flex generates as output a C source file,
|
||||
lex.yy.c, which defines a routine yylex(). This file is compiled and
|
||||
linked with the -lfl library to produce an executable. When the
|
||||
executable is run, it analyzes its input for occurrences of the regular
|
||||
expressions. Whenever it finds one, it executes the corresponding C
|
||||
code.
|
||||
|
||||
For full documentation, see flexdoc(1). This manual entry is intended for
|
||||
use as a quick reference.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
flex has the following options:
|
||||
|
||||
-b Generate backtracking information to lex.backtrack. This is a list
|
||||
of scanner states which require backtracking and the input
|
||||
characters on which they do so. By adding rules one can remove
|
||||
backtracking states. If all backtracking states are eliminated and
|
||||
-f or -F is used, the generated scanner will run faster.
|
||||
|
||||
-c is a do-nothing, deprecated option included for POSIX compliance.
|
||||
|
||||
NOTE: in previous releases of flex -c specified table-compression
|
||||
options. This functionality is now given by the -C flag. To ease
|
||||
the the impact of this change, when flex encounters -c, it currently
|
||||
issues a warning message and assumes that -C was desired instead.
|
||||
In the future this "promotion" of -c to -C will go away in the name
|
||||
of full POSIX compliance (unless the POSIX meaning is removed
|
||||
first).
|
||||
|
||||
-d makes the generated scanner run in debug mode. Whenever a pattern
|
||||
is recognized and the global yy_flex_debug is non-zero (which is the
|
||||
default), the scanner will write to stderr a line of the form:
|
||||
|
||||
--accepting rule at line 53 ("the matched text")
|
||||
|
||||
The line number refers to the location of the rule in the file
|
||||
defining the scanner (i.e., the file that was fed to flex).
|
||||
Messages are also generated when the scanner backtracks, accepts the
|
||||
default rule, reaches the end of its input buffer (or encounters a
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
26 May 1990 1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FLEX(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FLEX(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NUL; the two look the same as far as the scanner's concerned), or
|
||||
reaches an end-of-file.
|
||||
|
||||
-f specifies (take your pick) full table or fast scanner. No table
|
||||
compression is done. The result is large but fast. This option is
|
||||
equivalent to -Cf (see below).
|
||||
|
||||
-i instructs flex to generate a case-insensitive scanner. The case of
|
||||
letters given in the flex input patterns will be ignored, and tokens
|
||||
in the input will be matched regardless of case. The matched text
|
||||
given in yytext will have the preserved case (i.e., it will not be
|
||||
folded).
|
||||
|
||||
-n is another do-nothing, deprecated option included only for POSIX
|
||||
compliance.
|
||||
|
||||
-p generates a performance report to stderr. The report consists of
|
||||
comments regarding features of the flex input file which will cause
|
||||
a loss of performance in the resulting scanner.
|
||||
|
||||
-s causes the default rule (that unmatched scanner input is echoed to
|
||||
stdout) to be suppressed. If the scanner encounters input that does
|
||||
not match any of its rules, it aborts with an error.
|
||||
|
||||
-t instructs flex to write the scanner it generates to standard output
|
||||
instead of lex.yy.c.
|
||||
|
||||
-v specifies that flex should write to stderr a summary of statistics
|
||||
regarding the scanner it generates.
|
||||
|
||||
-F specifies that the fast scanner table representation should be used.
|
||||
This representation is about as fast as the full table
|
||||
representation (-f), and for some sets of patterns will be
|
||||
considerably smaller (and for others, larger). See flexdoc(1) for
|
||||
details.
|
||||
|
||||
This option is equivalent to -CF (see below).
|
||||
|
||||
-I instructs flex to generate an interactive scanner, that is, a
|
||||
scanner which stops immediately rather than looking ahead if it
|
||||
knows that the currently scanned text cannot be part of a longer
|
||||
rule's match. Again, see flexdoc(1) for details.
|
||||
|
||||
Note, -I cannot be used in conjunction with full or fast tables,
|
||||
i.e., the -f, -F, -Cf, or -CF flags.
|
||||
|
||||
-L instructs flex not to generate #line directives in lex.yy.c. The
|
||||
default is to generate such directives so error messages in the
|
||||
actions will be correctly located with respect to the original flex
|
||||
input file, and not to the fairly meaningless line numbers of
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
26 May 1990 2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FLEX(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FLEX(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
lex.yy.c.
|
||||
|
||||
-T makes flex run in trace mode. It will generate a lot of messages to
|
||||
stdout concerning the form of the input and the resultant non-
|
||||
deterministic and deterministic finite automata. This option is
|
||||
mostly for use in maintaining flex.
|
||||
|
||||
-8 instructs flex to generate an 8-bit scanner. On some sites, this is
|
||||
the default. On others, the default is 7-bit characters. To see
|
||||
which is the case, check the verbose (-v) output for "equivalence
|
||||
classes created". If the denominator of the number shown is 128,
|
||||
then by default flex is generating 7-bit characters. If it is 256,
|
||||
then the default is 8-bit characters.
|
||||
|
||||
-C[efmF]
|
||||
controls the degree of table compression.
|
||||
|
||||
-Ce directs flex to construct equivalence classes, i.e., sets of
|
||||
characters which have identical lexical properties. Equivalence
|
||||
classes usually give dramatic reductions in the final table/object
|
||||
file sizes (typically a factor of 2-5) and are pretty cheap
|
||||
performance-wise (one array look-up per character scanned).
|
||||
|
||||
-Cf specifies that the full scanner tables should be generated -
|
||||
flex should not compress the tables by taking advantages of similar
|
||||
transition functions for different states.
|
||||
|
||||
-CF specifies that the alternate fast scanner representation
|
||||
(described in flexdoc(1)) should be used.
|
||||
|
||||
-Cm directs flex to construct meta-equivalence classes, which are
|
||||
sets of equivalence classes (or characters, if equivalence classes
|
||||
are not being used) that are commonly used together. Meta-
|
||||
equivalence classes are often a big win when using compressed
|
||||
tables, but they have a moderate performance impact (one or two "if"
|
||||
tests and one array look-up per character scanned).
|
||||
|
||||
A lone -C specifies that the scanner tables should be compressed but
|
||||
neither equivalence classes nor meta-equivalence classes should be
|
||||
used.
|
||||
|
||||
The options -Cf or -CF and -Cm do not make sense together - there is
|
||||
no opportunity for meta-equivalence classes if the table is not
|
||||
being compressed. Otherwise the options may be freely mixed.
|
||||
|
||||
The default setting is -Cem, which specifies that flex should
|
||||
generate equivalence classes and meta-equivalence classes. This
|
||||
setting provides the highest degree of table compression. You can
|
||||
trade off faster-executing scanners at the cost of larger tables
|
||||
with the following generally being true:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
26 May 1990 3
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FLEX(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FLEX(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
slowest & smallest
|
||||
-Cem
|
||||
-Cm
|
||||
-Ce
|
||||
-C
|
||||
-C{f,F}e
|
||||
-C{f,F}
|
||||
fastest & largest
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
-C options are not cumulative; whenever the flag is encountered, the
|
||||
previous -C settings are forgotten.
|
||||
|
||||
-Sskeleton_file
|
||||
overrides the default skeleton file from which flex constructs its
|
||||
scanners. You'll never need this option unless you are doing flex
|
||||
maintenance or development.
|
||||
|
||||
SUMMARY OF FLEX REGULAR EXPRESSIONS
|
||||
The patterns in the input are written using an extended set of regular
|
||||
expressions. These are:
|
||||
|
||||
x match the character 'x'
|
||||
. any character except newline
|
||||
[xyz] a "character class"; in this case, the pattern
|
||||
matches either an 'x', a 'y', or a 'z'
|
||||
[abj-oZ] a "character class" with a range in it; matches
|
||||
an 'a', a 'b', any letter from 'j' through 'o',
|
||||
or a 'Z'
|
||||
[^A-Z] a "negated character class", i.e., any character
|
||||
but those in the class. In this case, any
|
||||
character EXCEPT an uppercase letter.
|
||||
[^A-Z\n] any character EXCEPT an uppercase letter or
|
||||
a newline
|
||||
r* zero or more r's, where r is any regular expression
|
||||
r+ one or more r's
|
||||
r? zero or one r's (that is, "an optional r")
|
||||
r{2,5} anywhere from two to five r's
|
||||
r{2,} two or more r's
|
||||
r{4} exactly 4 r's
|
||||
{name} the expansion of the "name" definition
|
||||
(see above)
|
||||
"[xyz]\"foo"
|
||||
the literal string: [xyz]"foo
|
||||
\X if X is an 'a', 'b', 'f', 'n', 'r', 't', or 'v',
|
||||
then the ANSI-C interpretation of \x.
|
||||
Otherwise, a literal 'X' (used to escape
|
||||
operators such as '*')
|
||||
\123 the character with octal value 123
|
||||
\x2a the character with hexadecimal value 2a
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
26 May 1990 4
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FLEX(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FLEX(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
(r) match an r; parentheses are used to override
|
||||
precedence (see below)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
rs the regular expression r followed by the
|
||||
regular expression s; called "concatenation"
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
r|s either an r or an s
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
r/s an r but only if it is followed by an s. The
|
||||
s is not part of the matched text. This type
|
||||
of pattern is called as "trailing context".
|
||||
^r an r, but only at the beginning of a line
|
||||
r$ an r, but only at the end of a line. Equivalent
|
||||
to "r/\n".
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<s>r an r, but only in start condition s (see
|
||||
below for discussion of start conditions)
|
||||
<s1,s2,s3>r
|
||||
same, but in any of start conditions s1,
|
||||
s2, or s3
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<<EOF>> an end-of-file
|
||||
<s1,s2><<EOF>>
|
||||
an end-of-file when in start condition s1 or s2
|
||||
|
||||
The regular expressions listed above are grouped according to precedence,
|
||||
from highest precedence at the top to lowest at the bottom. Those
|
||||
grouped together have equal precedence.
|
||||
|
||||
Some notes on patterns:
|
||||
|
||||
- Negated character classes match newlines unless "\n" (or an
|
||||
equivalent escape sequence) is one of the characters explicitly
|
||||
present in the negated character class (e.g., "[^A-Z\n]").
|
||||
|
||||
- A rule can have at most one instance of trailing context (the '/'
|
||||
operator or the '$' operator). The start condition, '^', and
|
||||
"<<EOF>>" patterns can only occur at the beginning of a pattern,
|
||||
and, as well as with '/' and '$', cannot be grouped inside
|
||||
parentheses. The following are all illegal:
|
||||
|
||||
foo/bar$
|
||||
foo|(bar$)
|
||||
foo|^bar
|
||||
<sc1>foo<sc2>bar
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
26 May 1990 5
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FLEX(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FLEX(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SUMMARY OF SPECIAL ACTIONS
|
||||
In addition to arbitrary C code, the following can appear in actions:
|
||||
|
||||
- ECHO copies yytext to the scanner's output.
|
||||
|
||||
- BEGIN followed by the name of a start condition places the scanner
|
||||
in the corresponding start condition.
|
||||
|
||||
- REJECT directs the scanner to proceed on to the "second best" rule
|
||||
which matched the input (or a prefix of the input). yytext and
|
||||
yyleng are set up appropriately. Note that REJECT is a particularly
|
||||
expensive feature in terms scanner performance; if it is used in any
|
||||
of the scanner's actions it will slow down all of the scanner's
|
||||
matching. Furthermore, REJECT cannot be used with the -f or -F
|
||||
options.
|
||||
|
||||
Note also that unlike the other special actions, REJECT is a branch;
|
||||
code immediately following it in the action will not be executed.
|
||||
|
||||
- yymore() tells the scanner that the next time it matches a rule, the
|
||||
corresponding token should be appended onto the current value of
|
||||
yytext rather than replacing it.
|
||||
|
||||
- yyless(n) returns all but the first n characters of the current
|
||||
token back to the input stream, where they will be rescanned when
|
||||
the scanner looks for the next match. yytext and yyleng are
|
||||
adjusted appropriately (e.g., yyleng will now be equal to n ).
|
||||
|
||||
- unput(c) puts the character c back onto the input stream. It will
|
||||
be the next character scanned.
|
||||
|
||||
- input() reads the next character from the input stream (this routine
|
||||
is called yyinput() if the scanner is compiled using C++).
|
||||
|
||||
- yyterminate() can be used in lieu of a return statement in an
|
||||
action. It terminates the scanner and returns a 0 to the scanner's
|
||||
caller, indicating "all done".
|
||||
|
||||
By default, yyterminate() is also called when an end-of-file is
|
||||
encountered. It is a macro and may be redefined.
|
||||
|
||||
- YY_NEW_FILE is an action available only in <<EOF>> rules. It means
|
||||
"Okay, I've set up a new input file, continue scanning".
|
||||
|
||||
- yy_create_buffer( file, size ) takes a FILE pointer and an integer
|
||||
size. It returns a YY_BUFFER_STATE handle to a new input buffer
|
||||
large enough to accomodate size characters and associated with the
|
||||
given file. When in doubt, use YY_BUF_SIZE for the size.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
26 May 1990 6
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FLEX(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FLEX(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
- yy_switch_to_buffer( new_buffer ) switches the scanner's processing
|
||||
to scan for tokens from the given buffer, which must be a
|
||||
YY_BUFFER_STATE.
|
||||
|
||||
- yy_delete_buffer( buffer ) deletes the given buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
VALUES AVAILABLE TO THE USER
|
||||
|
||||
- char *yytext holds the text of the current token. It may not be
|
||||
modified.
|
||||
|
||||
- int yyleng holds the length of the current token. It may not be
|
||||
modified.
|
||||
|
||||
- FILE *yyin is the file which by default flex reads from. It may be
|
||||
redefined but doing so only makes sense before scanning begins.
|
||||
Changing it in the middle of scanning will have unexpected results
|
||||
since flex buffers its input. Once scanning terminates because an
|
||||
end-of-file has been seen, void yyrestart( FILE *new_file ) may be
|
||||
called to point yyin at the new input file.
|
||||
|
||||
- FILE *yyout is the file to which ECHO actions are done. It can be
|
||||
reassigned by the user.
|
||||
|
||||
- YY_CURRENT_BUFFER returns a YY_BUFFER_STATE handle to the current
|
||||
buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
MACROS THE USER CAN REDEFINE
|
||||
|
||||
- YY_DECL controls how the scanning routine is declared. By default,
|
||||
it is "int yylex()", or, if prototypes are being used, "int
|
||||
yylex(void)". This definition may be changed by redefining the
|
||||
"YY_DECL" macro. Note that if you give arguments to the scanning
|
||||
routine using a K&R-style/non-prototyped function declaration, you
|
||||
must terminate the definition with a semi-colon (;).
|
||||
|
||||
- The nature of how the scanner gets its input can be controlled by
|
||||
redefining the YY_INPUT macro. YY_INPUT's calling sequence is
|
||||
"YY_INPUT(buf,result,max_size)". Its action is to place up to
|
||||
max_size characters in the character array buf and return in the
|
||||
integer variable result either the number of characters read or the
|
||||
constant YY_NULL (0 on Unix systems) to indicate EOF. The default
|
||||
YY_INPUT reads from the global file-pointer "yyin". A sample
|
||||
redefinition of YY_INPUT (in the definitions section of the input
|
||||
file):
|
||||
|
||||
%{
|
||||
#undef YY_INPUT
|
||||
#define YY_INPUT(buf,result,max_size) \
|
||||
{ \
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
26 May 1990 7
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FLEX(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FLEX(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
int c = getchar(); \
|
||||
result = (c == EOF) ? YY_NULL : (buf[0] = c, 1); \
|
||||
}
|
||||
%}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
- When the scanner receives an end-of-file indication from YY_INPUT,
|
||||
it then checks the yywrap() function. If yywrap() returns false
|
||||
(zero), then it is assumed that the function has gone ahead and set
|
||||
up yyin to point to another input file, and scanning continues. If
|
||||
it returns true (non-zero), then the scanner terminates, returning 0
|
||||
to its caller.
|
||||
|
||||
The default yywrap() always returns 1. Presently, to redefine it
|
||||
you must first "#undef yywrap", as it is currently implemented as a
|
||||
macro. It is likely that yywrap() will soon be defined to be a
|
||||
function rather than a macro.
|
||||
|
||||
- YY_USER_ACTION can be redefined to provide an action which is always
|
||||
executed prior to the matched rule's action.
|
||||
|
||||
- The macro YY_USER_INIT may be redefined to provide an action which
|
||||
is always executed before the first scan.
|
||||
|
||||
- In the generated scanner, the actions are all gathered in one large
|
||||
switch statement and separated using YY_BREAK, which may be
|
||||
redefined. By default, it is simply a "break", to separate each
|
||||
rule's action from the following rule's.
|
||||
|
||||
FILES
|
||||
|
||||
flex.skel
|
||||
skeleton scanner.
|
||||
|
||||
lex.yy.c
|
||||
generated scanner (called lexyy.c on some systems).
|
||||
|
||||
lex.backtrack
|
||||
backtracking information for -b flag (called lex.bck on some
|
||||
systems).
|
||||
|
||||
-lfl library with which to link the scanners.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
flexdoc(1), lex(1), yacc(1), sed(1), awk(1).
|
||||
|
||||
M. E. Lesk and E. Schmidt, LEX - Lexical Analyzer Generator
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
26 May 1990 8
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FLEX(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FLEX(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
reject_used_but_not_detected undefined or
|
||||
|
||||
yymore_used_but_not_detected undefined - These errors can occur at
|
||||
compile time. They indicate that the scanner uses REJECT or yymore() but
|
||||
that flex failed to notice the fact, meaning that flex scanned the first
|
||||
two sections looking for occurrences of these actions and failed to find
|
||||
any, but somehow you snuck some in (via a #include file, for example).
|
||||
Make an explicit reference to the action in your flex input file. (Note
|
||||
that previously flex supported a %used/%unused mechanism for dealing with
|
||||
this problem; this feature is still supported but now deprecated, and
|
||||
will go away soon unless the author hears from people who can argue
|
||||
compellingly that they need it.)
|
||||
|
||||
flex scanner jammed - a scanner compiled with -s has encountered an input
|
||||
string which wasn't matched by any of its rules.
|
||||
|
||||
flex input buffer overflowed - a scanner rule matched a string long
|
||||
enough to overflow the scanner's internal input buffer (16K bytes -
|
||||
controlled by YY_BUF_MAX in "flex.skel").
|
||||
|
||||
scanner requires -8 flag - Your scanner specification includes
|
||||
recognizing 8-bit characters and you did not specify the -8 flag (and
|
||||
your site has not installed flex with -8 as the default).
|
||||
|
||||
fatal flex scanner internal error--end of buffer missed - This can occur
|
||||
in an scanner which is reentered after a long-jump has jumped out (or
|
||||
over) the scanner's activation frame. Before reentering the scanner,
|
||||
use:
|
||||
|
||||
yyrestart( yyin );
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
too many %t classes! - You managed to put every single character into its
|
||||
own %t class. flex requires that at least one of the classes share
|
||||
characters.
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Vern Paxson, with the help of many ideas and much inspiration from Van
|
||||
Jacobson. Original version by Jef Poskanzer.
|
||||
|
||||
See flexdoc(1) for additional credits and the address to send comments
|
||||
to.
|
||||
|
||||
DEFICIENCIES / BUGS
|
||||
|
||||
Some trailing context patterns cannot be properly matched and generate
|
||||
warning messages ("Dangerous trailing context"). These are patterns
|
||||
where the ending of the first part of the rule matches the beginning of
|
||||
the second part, such as "zx*/xy*", where the 'x*' matches the 'x' at the
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
26 May 1990 9
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FLEX(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FLEX(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
beginning of the trailing context. (Note that the POSIX draft states
|
||||
that the text matched by such patterns is undefined.)
|
||||
|
||||
For some trailing context rules, parts which are actually fixed-length
|
||||
are not recognized as such, leading to the abovementioned performance
|
||||
loss. In particular, parts using '|' or {n} (such as "foo{3}") are
|
||||
always considered variable-length.
|
||||
|
||||
Combining trailing context with the special '|' action can result in
|
||||
fixed trailing context being turned into the more expensive variable
|
||||
trailing context. For example, this happens in the following example:
|
||||
|
||||
%%
|
||||
abc |
|
||||
xyz/def
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Use of unput() invalidates yytext and yyleng.
|
||||
|
||||
Use of unput() to push back more text than was matched can result in the
|
||||
pushed-back text matching a beginning-of-line ('^') rule even though it
|
||||
didn't come at the beginning of the line (though this is rare!).
|
||||
|
||||
Pattern-matching of NUL's is substantially slower than matching other
|
||||
characters.
|
||||
|
||||
flex does not generate correct #line directives for code internal to the
|
||||
scanner; thus, bugs in flex.skel yield bogus line numbers.
|
||||
|
||||
Due to both buffering of input and read-ahead, you cannot intermix calls
|
||||
to <stdio.h> routines, such as, for example, getchar(), with flex rules
|
||||
and expect it to work. Call input() instead.
|
||||
|
||||
The total table entries listed by the -v flag excludes the number of
|
||||
table entries needed to determine what rule has been matched. The number
|
||||
of entries is equal to the number of DFA states if the scanner does not
|
||||
use REJECT, and somewhat greater than the number of states if it does.
|
||||
|
||||
REJECT cannot be used with the -f or -F options.
|
||||
|
||||
Some of the macros, such as yywrap(), may in the future become functions
|
||||
which live in the -lfl library. This will doubtless break a lot of code,
|
||||
but may be required for POSIX-compliance.
|
||||
|
||||
The flex internal algorithms need documentation.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
26 May 1990 10
|
||||
|
||||
2006
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FLEXDOC.1
Normal file
2006
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FLEXDOC.1
Normal file
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FMT.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FMT.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FMT(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FMT(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
fmt - adjust line-length for paragraphs of text
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
fmt [-width] [files]...
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
fmt is a simple text formatter. It inserts or deletes newlines, as
|
||||
necessary, to make all lines in a paragraph be approximately the same
|
||||
width. It preserves indentation and word spacing.
|
||||
|
||||
The default line width is 72 characters. You can override this with the
|
||||
-width flag. If you don't name any files on the command line, then fmt
|
||||
will read from stdin.
|
||||
|
||||
It is typically used from within vi to adjust the line breaks in a single
|
||||
paragraph. To do this, move the cursor to the top of the paragraph, type
|
||||
"!}fmt", and hit <Return>.
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Steve Kirkendall
|
||||
kirkenda@cs.pdx.edu
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FOLD.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FOLD.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FOLD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FOLD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
fold - fold long lines
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
fold [-n] [file] ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-n How long should the output lines be
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
fold -60 # Fold stdin to 60 characters
|
||||
|
||||
fold file # Fold file to 80 characters
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Fold takes copies its input from the named file (or stdin, if none is
|
||||
specified) to standard output. However, lines longer than the given
|
||||
maximum (default 80) are broken into multiple lines of the maximum length
|
||||
by inserting new line characters.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
width(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FORMAT.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FORMAT.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FORMAT(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FORMAT(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
format - format a PC floppy diskette
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
format [-v] device [media-size [drive-size]]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Format allows a user with read-write permission to device to format a
|
||||
floppy. Either one of the special floppy devices must be used, see
|
||||
fd(4), or an automatic device may be used with the size of the floppy
|
||||
specified on the command line. Two sizes must be given when formatting a
|
||||
low density diskette in a high density drive. For example:
|
||||
|
||||
format /dev/at1
|
||||
format /dev/fd1 1200
|
||||
format /dev/fd1 360 1200
|
||||
|
||||
The first two commands format a 1.2M diskette, the last formats a 360k
|
||||
diskette in a 1.2M drive. A 1.44M drive knows when it's dealing with a
|
||||
low density floppy, so all these commands format a 720k diskette:
|
||||
|
||||
format /dev/fd0 720
|
||||
format /dev/fd0 720 1440
|
||||
format /dev/ps0
|
||||
|
||||
No sizes may be specified when using a special floppy device, a size must
|
||||
be specified when using an automatic device.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-v Verify the process by reading each track after formatting it.
|
||||
Formatting is normally blind, the controller has no idea whether it
|
||||
succeeds or not. Use -v on a new box of cheap diskettes, or on a
|
||||
diskette that may have gone bad. Verifying will increase formatting
|
||||
time by 50%.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
mkfs(1), fd(4).
|
||||
|
||||
DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
Numbers will be printed on standard output to show that it is busy. The
|
||||
locations of bad sectors are printed on standard error when verifying.
|
||||
The exit code is zero unless there are too many bad spots.
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FORTUNE.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FORTUNE.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FORTUNE(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FORTUNE(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
fortune - print a fortune
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
fortune
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
fortune # Print a fortune
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Fortune prints a fortune at random from the fortunes file,
|
||||
/usr/lib/fortune.dat. This file consists of pieces of text separated by
|
||||
a line containing only %%.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FSCK.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/FSCK.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FSCK(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FSCK(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
fsck, fsck1 - perform file system consistency check
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
fsck [-aclmrs] [device] ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-a Automatically repair inconsistencies
|
||||
|
||||
-c Check and list only the specified i-nodes
|
||||
|
||||
-l List the files and directories in the filesytem
|
||||
|
||||
-r Prompt user for repairs if inconsistencies are found
|
||||
|
||||
-s List the superblock of the file system
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
fsck /dev/hd4 # Check file system on /dev/hd4
|
||||
|
||||
fsck -a /dev/at0 # Automatically fix errors on /dev/at0
|
||||
|
||||
fsck -l /dev/fd0 # List the contents of /dev/fd0
|
||||
|
||||
fsck -c 2 3 /dev/hd3
|
||||
# Check and list /dev/hd3 i-nodes 2 & 3
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Fsck performs consistency checks on the file systems which reside on the
|
||||
specified devices. Fsck1 is an alternate version for use on obsolete V1
|
||||
file systems. When either the -a or -r flags are given, the file system
|
||||
will be repaired if errors are found. Before running fsck on a mounted
|
||||
file system, it must first be unmounted. Trying to repair a mounted file
|
||||
system is dangerous and should not be attempted.
|
||||
|
||||
To repair the root file system (which cannot be unmounted), first type
|
||||
CTRL-F9 at the console to kill any and all processes. Log back in as
|
||||
root, type sync to force any buffered changes to disk, run fsck on the
|
||||
root file system and immediately reboot the computer by typing reboot.
|
||||
|
||||
It is necessary to kill all processes before repairing the root file
|
||||
system to prevent them from modifying any disk blocks while fsck is
|
||||
running. This is only necessary for the root file system, any other file
|
||||
system can simply be unmounted before it is checked.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
FSCK(1) Minix Programmer's Manual FSCK(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
mkfs(1), mount(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/GATHER.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/GATHER.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GATHER(1) Minix Programmer's Manual GATHER(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
gather - gather up the files in a directory for transmission
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
gather [-s] source_dir [-d] dest_dir [-b] bytes [-f] file
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-b Desired number of bytes per output file
|
||||
|
||||
-d Destination directory
|
||||
|
||||
-f Base name of output files
|
||||
|
||||
-s Source directory
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
gather # Collect files in current dir into 60K archives
|
||||
|
||||
gather -d dir # Put the archives in dir
|
||||
|
||||
gather -b 90000 # Try to produce 90K archives
|
||||
|
||||
gather -s .. -d targ -b 5000
|
||||
# Try to produce 5K archives
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
It is often useful to collect all the files in a directory into one or
|
||||
more archives for transmission by mail. This program collects all the
|
||||
files in the source directory (default: current directory) and puts them
|
||||
into a shar archive. The shar archive is then compressed and uuencoded.
|
||||
An attempt is made to have the final .uue file be about the given size
|
||||
(default: 60K), but since gather cannot really predict how much shar will
|
||||
add to the file, how much compress will reduce the file, and how much uue
|
||||
will add again, the sizes can fluctuate. If the -f file flag is given,
|
||||
the archives will be given the names file_00.uue, file_01.uue etc. If -f
|
||||
is not given, the name of the source directory is used as the base name.
|
||||
Since 7 characters of suffix are appended, the base name should not
|
||||
exceed 7 characters.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/GREP.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/GREP.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
GREP(1) Minix Programmer's Manual GREP(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
grep - search a file for lines containing a given pattern
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
grep [-elnsv] pattern [file] ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-e -e pattern is the same as pattern
|
||||
|
||||
-c Print a count of lines matched
|
||||
|
||||
-i Ignore case
|
||||
|
||||
-l Print file names, no lines
|
||||
|
||||
-n Print line numbers
|
||||
|
||||
-s Status only, no printed output
|
||||
|
||||
-v Select lines that do not match
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
grep mouse file # Find lines in file containing mouse
|
||||
|
||||
grep [0-9] file # Print lines containing a digit
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Grep searches one or more files (by default, stdin) and selects out all
|
||||
the lines that match the pattern. All the regular expressions accepted
|
||||
by ed and mined are allowed. In addition, + can be used instead of * to
|
||||
mean 1 or more occurrences, ? can be used to mean 0 or 1 occurrences, and
|
||||
| can be used between two regular expressions to mean either one of them.
|
||||
Parentheses can be used for grouping. If a match is found, exit status 0
|
||||
is returned. If no match is found, exit status 1 is returned. If an
|
||||
error is detected, exit status 2 is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cgrep(1), fgrep(1), sed(1), awk(9).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/HEAD.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/HEAD.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HEAD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual HEAD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
head - print the first few lines of a file
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
head [-n] [file] ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-n How many lines to print
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
head -6 # Print first 6 lines of stdin
|
||||
|
||||
head -1 file1 file2 # Print first line of two files
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
The first few lines of one or more files are printed. The default count
|
||||
is 10 lines. The default file is stdin.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
tail(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
177
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/HOST.1
Normal file
177
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/HOST.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HOST(1) Minix Programmer's Manual HOST(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
host - look up host names using domain server
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
host [-l] [-v] [-w] [-r] [-d] [-t querytype] [-a] host [ server ]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Host looks for information about Internet hosts. It gets this
|
||||
information from a set of interconnected servers that are spread across
|
||||
the country. By default, it simply converts between host names and
|
||||
Internet addresses. However with the -t or -a options, it can be used to
|
||||
find all of the information about this host that is maintained by the
|
||||
domain server.
|
||||
|
||||
The arguments can be either host names or host numbers. The program
|
||||
first attempts to interpret them as host numbers. If this fails, it will
|
||||
treat them as host names. A host number consists of first decimal
|
||||
numbers separated by dots, e.g. 128.6.4.194 A host name consists of names
|
||||
separated by dots, e.g. topaz.rutgers.edu. Unless the name ends in a dot,
|
||||
the local domain is automatically tacked on the end. Thus a Rutgers user
|
||||
can say "host topaz", and it will actually look up "topaz.rutgers.edu".
|
||||
If this fails, the name is tried unchanged (in this case, "topaz"). This
|
||||
same convention is used for mail and other network utilities. The actual
|
||||
suffix to tack on the end is obtained by looking at the results of a
|
||||
"hostname" call, and using everything starting at the first dot. (See
|
||||
below for a description of how to customize the host name lookup.)
|
||||
|
||||
The first argument is the host name you want to look up. If this is a
|
||||
number, an "inverse query" is done, i.e. the domain system looks in a
|
||||
separate set of databases used to convert numbers to names.
|
||||
|
||||
The second argument is optional. It allows you to specify a particular
|
||||
server to query. If you don't specify this argument, the default server
|
||||
(normally the local machine) is used.
|
||||
|
||||
If a name is specified, you may see output of three different kinds.
|
||||
Here is an example that shows all of them:
|
||||
% host sun4
|
||||
sun4.rutgers.edu is a nickname for ATHOS.RUTGERS.EDU
|
||||
ATHOS.RUTGERS.EDU has address 128.6.5.46
|
||||
ATHOS.RUTGERS.EDU has address 128.6.4.4
|
||||
ATHOS.RUTGERS.EDU mail is handled by ARAMIS.RUTGERS.EDU
|
||||
The user has typed the command "host sun4". The first line indicates
|
||||
that the name "sun4.rutgers.edu" is actually a nickname. The official
|
||||
host name is "ATHOS.RUTGERS.EDU'. The next two lines show the address.
|
||||
If a system has more than one network interface, there will be a separate
|
||||
address for each. The last line indicates that ATHOS.RUTGERS.EDU does
|
||||
not receive its own mail. Mail for it is taken by ARAMIS.RUTGERS.EDU.
|
||||
There may be more than one such line, since some systems have more than
|
||||
one other system that will handle mail for them. Technically, every
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HOST(1) Minix Programmer's Manual HOST(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
system that can receive mail is supposed to have an entry of this kind.
|
||||
If the system receives its own mail, there should be an entry the
|
||||
mentions the system itself, for example "XXX mail is handled by XXX".
|
||||
However many systems that receive their own mail do not bother to mention
|
||||
that fact. If a system has a "mail is handled by" entry, but no address,
|
||||
this indicates that it is not really part of the Internet, but a system
|
||||
that is on the network will forward mail to it. Systems on Usenet,
|
||||
Bitnet, and a number of other networks have entries of this kind.
|
||||
|
||||
There are a number of options that can be used before the host name.
|
||||
Most of these options are meaningful only to the staff who have to
|
||||
maintain the domain database.
|
||||
|
||||
The option -w causes host to wait forever for a response. Normally it
|
||||
will time out after around a minute.
|
||||
|
||||
The option -v causes printout to be in a "verbose" format. This is the
|
||||
official domain master file format, which is documented in the man page
|
||||
for "named". Without this option, output still follows this format in
|
||||
general terms, but some attempt is made to make it more intelligible to
|
||||
normal users. Without -v, "a", "mx", and "cname" records are written out
|
||||
as "has address", "mail is handled by", and "is a nickname for", and TTL
|
||||
and class fields are not shown.
|
||||
|
||||
The option -r causes recursion to be turned off in the request. This
|
||||
means that the name server will return only data it has in its own
|
||||
database. It will not ask other servers for more information.
|
||||
|
||||
The option -d turns on debugging. Network transactions are shown in
|
||||
detail.
|
||||
|
||||
The option -t allows you to specify a particular type of information to
|
||||
be looked up. The arguments are defined in the man page for "named".
|
||||
Currently supported types are a, ns, md, mf, cname, soa, mb, mg, mr,
|
||||
null, wks, ptr, hinfo, minfo, mx, uinfo, uid, gid, unspec, and the
|
||||
wildcard, which may be written as either "any" or "*". Types must be
|
||||
given in lower case. Note that the default is to look first for "a", and
|
||||
then "mx", except that if the verbose option is turned on, the default is
|
||||
only "a".
|
||||
|
||||
The option -a (for "all") is equivalent to "-v -t any".
|
||||
|
||||
The option -l causes a listing of a complete domain. E.g.
|
||||
host -l rutgers.edu
|
||||
will give a listing of all hosts in the rutgers.edu domain. The -t
|
||||
option is used to filter what information is presented, as you would
|
||||
expect. The default is address information, which also include PTR and
|
||||
NS records. The command
|
||||
host -l -v -t any rutgers.edu
|
||||
will give a complete download of the zone data for rutgers.edu, in the
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HOST(1) Minix Programmer's Manual HOST(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
official master file format. (However the SOA record is listed twice,
|
||||
for arcane reasons.) NOTE: -l is implemented by doing a complete zone
|
||||
transfer and then filtering out the information the you have asked for.
|
||||
This command should be used only if it is absolutely necessary.
|
||||
|
||||
CUSTOMIZING HOST NAME LOOKUP
|
||||
In general, if the name supplied by the user does not have any dots in
|
||||
it, a default domain is appended to the end. This domain can be defined
|
||||
in /etc/resolv.conf, but is normally derived by taking the local hostname
|
||||
after its first dot. The user can override this, and specify a different
|
||||
default domain, using the environment variable LOCALDOMAIN. In addition,
|
||||
the user can supply his own abbreviations for host names. They should be
|
||||
in a file consisting of one line per abbreviation. Each line contains an
|
||||
abbreviation, a space, and then the full host name. This file must be
|
||||
pointed to by an environment variable HOSTALIASES, which is the name of
|
||||
the file.
|
||||
|
||||
See Also
|
||||
named (8)
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
Unexpected effects can happen when you type a name that is not part of
|
||||
the local domain. Please always keep in mind the fact that the local
|
||||
domain name is tacked onto the end of every name, unless it ends in a
|
||||
dot. Only if this fails is the name used unchanged.
|
||||
|
||||
The -l option only tries the first name server listed for the domain that
|
||||
you have requested. If this server is dead, you may need to specify a
|
||||
server manually. E.g. to get a listing of foo.edu, you could try "host -t
|
||||
ns foo.edu" to get a list of all the name servers for foo.edu, and then
|
||||
try "host -l foo.edu xxx" for all xxx on the list of name servers, until
|
||||
you find one that works.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/HOSTADDR.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/HOSTADDR.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HOSTADDR(1) Minix Programmer's Manual HOSTADDR(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
hostaddr - show ethernet address, IP address or hostname
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
hostaddr [-eia] [-E eth-device] [-I ip-device]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Without any of the -eia options, hostaddr shows the ethernet address, IP
|
||||
address and hostname of the local host on one line in the given order.
|
||||
With options only the wanted fields are shown, still in the same order,
|
||||
not in option order.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-e Show the ethernet address.
|
||||
|
||||
-i Show the IP address. This will not work if no IP address has been
|
||||
found by RARP or by setting it with ifconfig(8).
|
||||
|
||||
-a Show the fully qualified hostname. The IP address is shown again if
|
||||
it can't be translated to a host name. (This usually indicates that
|
||||
the DNS reverse address translation tables are incomplete.)
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
ifconfig(8), rarpd(8), nonamed(8), set_net_default(8), boot(8).
|
||||
|
||||
DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
"Timeout"
|
||||
Hostaddr timed out trying to get the IP address. This means that the
|
||||
network connection is out of order or that the setup of the machine is
|
||||
bad.
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
177
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/IC.1
Normal file
177
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/IC.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IC(1) Minix Programmer's Manual IC(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
ic - integer calculator
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
ic [expression]
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
ic # Start the calculator
|
||||
|
||||
ic 250 300+ # Start calculator with 550 on the stack
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Ic is a simple RPN (Reverse Polish Notation) calculator, used for small
|
||||
calculations and base conversions. All calculations are done using 32 bit
|
||||
integers. The standard input is usually a keyboard and the standard
|
||||
output requires a device with a 'termcap' entry. The program starts by
|
||||
interpreting any <args> as commands, where the separation between
|
||||
arguments is considered to be the same as the ENTER key. For example,
|
||||
|
||||
ic 692 784+
|
||||
|
||||
After reading the arguments input is from the keyboard.
|
||||
|
||||
Stack Operations
|
||||
|
||||
The operation of this program is similar to an RPN calculator. A six
|
||||
level stack is used. The ENTER key pushes the stack up one level. For
|
||||
example, '12+5' is entered as '12 ENTER 5 +".
|
||||
|
||||
The top two entries on the stack are exchanged by the x command, and the
|
||||
stack is rolled down one (popped) by the p key. The top of the stack may
|
||||
be cleared by pressing the back-space key. The whole stack and the
|
||||
registers are initialized by a z.
|
||||
|
||||
Numeric Entry
|
||||
|
||||
The input and output bases are initially decimal, but they may be changed
|
||||
using the i and o commands. The i command changes both bases, but the o
|
||||
command changes just the output base. These commands take a one
|
||||
character argument of h, d, o or b to change to Hexadecimal, Decimal,
|
||||
Octal or Binary. While the input base is hexadecimal the letters a
|
||||
through f are used to represent the decimal values 10 through 15.
|
||||
|
||||
When the input base is decimal: multiply, divide and remainder are
|
||||
signed, otherwise they are performed unsigned.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IC(1) Minix Programmer's Manual IC(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The output base may also be changed to ASCII (a), this causes the least
|
||||
significant 7 bits of a value to be displayed as a character. To input an
|
||||
ASCII value the translate (t) command may be used, it accepts one
|
||||
character as its argument.
|
||||
|
||||
Calculations
|
||||
|
||||
The arithmetic operations supported are: Negate ('.'), Add ('+'),
|
||||
Subtract ('-'), Multiply ('*'), Divide ('/'), and Remainder ('%'). The
|
||||
logical (Boolean) operations available are: NOT ('~'), AND ('&'), OR
|
||||
('|'), and EXCLUSIVE-OR ('^').
|
||||
|
||||
After one of these operations the last top of stack value is saved. It
|
||||
may be restored by pressing l (L).
|
||||
|
||||
Saving Results
|
||||
|
||||
Ten temporary registers are available. The Store (s) command followed by
|
||||
a digit ('0'..'9') will copy the top of the stack to the specified
|
||||
register. The Recall (r) command pushes the contents of a register onto
|
||||
the top of the stack.
|
||||
|
||||
If the Store command is followed by a '+' preceding the digit, then the
|
||||
top of the stack will be added to the specified 'accumulator' register.
|
||||
|
||||
Values may also be written to a file. The w command writes the top of the
|
||||
stack, using the current output base, to a file called 'pad' in the
|
||||
current directory. If the user does not have write access to the current
|
||||
directory then the file /tmp/pad_$USER is used as the scratch pad. The
|
||||
scratch pad file is erased on the first use of the w command within each
|
||||
new invocation of 'ic'.
|
||||
|
||||
Miscellaneous
|
||||
|
||||
The Quit (q) key causes an immediate exit. The m command temporarily
|
||||
leaves ic by invoking the shell as a sub-process. For help while using
|
||||
ic, hit the h key. If an erroneous key is pressed the bell will sound.
|
||||
|
||||
Command Summary
|
||||
|
||||
Note that many commands have an alternative key-code available on the
|
||||
extended AT keyboard. This aids entry by including most commands on the
|
||||
right side of the keyboard.
|
||||
|
||||
ENTER Enter (push up)
|
||||
BS (DEL) Clear top of stack
|
||||
h Help
|
||||
i Input base (h, d, o, b)
|
||||
l (PGDN) Last top of stack
|
||||
m MINIX shell
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IC(1) Minix Programmer's Manual IC(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
o Output base (h, d, o, b, a)
|
||||
p (DOWN) Pop stack (roll down)
|
||||
q (END) Quit
|
||||
r (LEFT) Recall (0-9)
|
||||
s (RIGHT) Store [+] (0-9)
|
||||
t Translate (char)
|
||||
w (PGUP) Write top of stack to scratch pad
|
||||
x (UP) Exchange top of stack
|
||||
z (HOME) Zero all state
|
||||
. Change sign
|
||||
+ (+) Add
|
||||
- (-) Subtract
|
||||
* Multiply
|
||||
/ Divide
|
||||
% (sh/5) Remainder
|
||||
(tilde) Not
|
||||
& And
|
||||
| Or
|
||||
^ Exclusive-or
|
||||
|
||||
Author
|
||||
|
||||
Ic was written by Terrence W. Holm.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ID.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ID.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ID(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ID(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
id - print the uid and gid
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
id
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
id # Print the uid and gid
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Id prints the current uid and gid, both numerically and symbolically. If
|
||||
the effective uid and gid are different from the real ones, all of them
|
||||
are printed.
|
||||
|
||||
Under Minix-vmd the supplementary group IDs are also printed.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
getuid(2), getgid(2), getgroups(2).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/IFDEF.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/IFDEF.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
IFDEF(1) Minix Programmer's Manual IFDEF(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
ifdef - remove #ifdefs from a file
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
ifdef [-t] [-dsymbol] [-Dsymbol] [-Usymbol] [-Isymbol] [file]
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-D Define symbol permanently
|
||||
|
||||
-I Ignore symbol
|
||||
|
||||
-U Undefine symbol permanently
|
||||
|
||||
-d Define symbol. It may be #undef'ed later
|
||||
|
||||
-t Produce a table of the symbols on stdout
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
ifdef -DUNIX file.c >newfile.c
|
||||
# Define UNIX
|
||||
|
||||
ifdef -D_MINIX -UDOS <x.c >y.c
|
||||
# Define
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Ifdef allows conditional code [ #ifdef ... #endif ] to be selectively
|
||||
removed from C files, but at the same time leaving all other C
|
||||
preprocessor commands intact such as #define, #include etc. Input to
|
||||
ifdef is either the file named as the last argument, or stdin if no file
|
||||
is named. Output goes to stdout.
|
||||
|
||||
Symbols may be defined with the -d or -D flags just like cpp, except that
|
||||
the latter option ignores subsequent #undefs. It is not permitted to
|
||||
give values to symbols. Similarly, -U undefines a symbol and ignores
|
||||
subsequent #definess. Symbols defined with -I are ignored; any #ifdef
|
||||
using an ignored symbol will be left intact.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/INSTALL.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/INSTALL.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
INSTALL(1) Minix Programmer's Manual INSTALL(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
install - install files
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
install [-lcszN] [-o owner] [-g group] [-m mode] [-S stack] [file1] file2
|
||||
install [-lcszN] [-o owner] [-g group] [-m mode] [-S stack] file ... dir
|
||||
install -d [-o owner] [-g group] [-m mode] directory
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Install puts executables, manual pages, and library files in their proper
|
||||
place in the bin, man, and lib directories. The first two forms of the
|
||||
command are like cp(1) copying either one file to another or copying
|
||||
several files to a directory. The "-d" form is like mkdir(1) with the -p
|
||||
flag. File1 may be omitted if neither -l nor -c is given to change the
|
||||
attributes of file2.
|
||||
|
||||
Attributes are always copied from the source file, use the options to
|
||||
change. Note that the source file's attributes are changed with the
|
||||
destination file if they are linked. So copy the file if you change it
|
||||
in a way that makes it read-only. You would otherwise not be able to
|
||||
compile a command again.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-l Link the destination to the source file instead of copying it. This
|
||||
is done to either save space on a file system with both the source
|
||||
and the bin directories on it, or to install synonyms to a command.
|
||||
|
||||
-c Copy the source file to its proper place. This option is the
|
||||
default if -l is not given. With -l, the file is copied if the link
|
||||
fails.
|
||||
|
||||
-s Strip the destination file of its symbol table, if it is an
|
||||
executable, and if it is actually copied. It has no effect on a
|
||||
link or a non-executable.
|
||||
|
||||
-z Compress the executable using compress(1) and prepend a header line
|
||||
that calls zexec(1) to decompress and execute the binary. This will
|
||||
on average save 40% disk space at the expense of a slower startup
|
||||
time. Like -s the file must be actually copied for the flag to have
|
||||
effect.
|
||||
|
||||
-N Use gzip -N to compress the binary. You may see up to 60% space
|
||||
savings, but it will take much longer. N is a digit from 1 to 9
|
||||
telling the compression effort, see gzip(1).
|
||||
|
||||
-d Make a directory, usually to install files in a separate directory
|
||||
in a library. Intermediate directories in the path are created with
|
||||
the same attributes as the final directory. Only the attributes of
|
||||
the final directory are set if the directory exists.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
INSTALL(1) Minix Programmer's Manual INSTALL(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
-o owner
|
||||
Set the owner of the target. This only works if the invoker is the
|
||||
super-user, or if install is run setuid root and the invoker is a
|
||||
member of group zero. If -o is omitted then the ownership is copied
|
||||
from the source file, or set to the id of the invoker if a directory
|
||||
is made.
|
||||
|
||||
-g group
|
||||
Like -o, but for the group ownership of the target.
|
||||
|
||||
-m mode
|
||||
Mode is an octal number that specifies the mode the target should
|
||||
get. The default is the source file's mode with a chmod a+rX
|
||||
applied to it, or 755 for a new directory. Implies -o 0, or -g 0 if
|
||||
a file is to be set-uid or set-gid and the invoker has permission to
|
||||
change ownership. This trick allows a group 0 member to install
|
||||
third party software, even though it expects to be installed by
|
||||
root.
|
||||
|
||||
-S stack
|
||||
Sets the maximum amount of heap + stack that an executable may have
|
||||
when running. The argument is a C-style decimal, octal or
|
||||
hexadecimal number, optionally followed by the multipliers m, k, w,
|
||||
and b for mega (1024*1024), kilo (1024), "word" (2 or 4), and byte
|
||||
(1). Uppercase M is also accepted for those who know what S.I.
|
||||
means. The compilers use -S 32kw by default, that translates to
|
||||
64kb for an 8086, and 128kb for other architectures. This option is
|
||||
ignored on a non-executable.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
ln(1), cp(1), strip(1), compress(1), gzip(1), zexec(1), chown(8),
|
||||
chgrp(8), chmod(1), chmem(1), mkdir(1).
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
Uppercase K, W, and B are also accepted for those who don't know what
|
||||
S.I. means.
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ISODIR.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ISODIR.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ISODIR(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ISODIR(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
isodir - list ISO9660 or High Sierra directories
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
isodir -[lr] input_file [dir]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Isodir reads directories on a file system in ISO9660 or High Sierra Group
|
||||
format (usually residing on cdrom) and lists their contents on standard
|
||||
output. Directory names should contain slashes to separate components.
|
||||
The names isodir, isoread, and isoinfo are all links to the same program.
|
||||
The program sees which function to perform by looking how it was called.
|
||||
|
||||
-l Lists all info on files and directories (size, date, time)
|
||||
|
||||
-r Recursively descend and print subdirectories
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
Only Interchange level-1 is supported. The Red Rock extensions and
|
||||
Interchange level-2 are not implemented.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
isoread(1), isoinfo(1).
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Michel R. Prevenier (mrpreve@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ISOINFO.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ISOINFO.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ISOINFO(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ISOINFO(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
isoinfo - list an ISO9660 or High Sierra volume descriptor
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
isoinfo [input_file]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Isoinfo reads the volume descriptor from an ISO9660 or High Sierra Group
|
||||
file system (usually residing on cdrom) and lists its contents on
|
||||
standard output. isodir, isoread, and isoinfo are all links to the same
|
||||
program. The program sees which function to perform by looking how it
|
||||
was called.
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
Only Interchange level-1 is supported. The Red Rock extensions and
|
||||
Interchange level-2 are not implemented.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
isodir(1), isoread(1).
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Michel R. Prevenier (mrpreve@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ISOREAD.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/ISOREAD.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ISOREAD(1) Minix Programmer's Manual ISOREAD(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
isoread - read a file in ISO9660 or High Sierra format
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
isoread [input_file] file
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Isoread reads a file in ISO9660 or High Sierra Group format (usually
|
||||
residing on cdrom) and lists its contents on standard output. The file
|
||||
path should contain slashes to separate components. The names isodir,
|
||||
isoread, and isoinfo are all links to the same program. The program sees
|
||||
which function to perform by looking how it was called.
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
Only Interchange level-1 is supported. The Red Rock extensions and
|
||||
Interchange level-2 are not implemented.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
isodir(1), isoinfo(1).
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Michel R. Prevenier (mrpreve@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/JOIN.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/JOIN.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
JOIN(1) Minix Programmer's Manual JOIN(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
join - relational database operator
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
join [-an] [-e s] [-o list] [-tc] file1 file2
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Join forms, on the standard output, a join of the two relations specified
|
||||
by the lines of file1 and file2. If file1 is `-', the standard input is
|
||||
used.
|
||||
|
||||
File1 and file2 must be sorted in increasing ASCII collating sequence on
|
||||
the fields on which they are to be joined, normally the first in each
|
||||
line.
|
||||
|
||||
There is one line in the output for each pair of lines in file1 and file2
|
||||
that have identical join fields. The output line normally consists of
|
||||
the common field, then the rest of the line from file1, then the rest of
|
||||
the line from file2.
|
||||
|
||||
Fields are normally separated by blank, tab or newline. In this case,
|
||||
multiple separators count as one, and leading separators are discarded.
|
||||
|
||||
These options are recognized:
|
||||
|
||||
-an In addition to the normal output, produce a line for each unpairable
|
||||
line in file n, where n is 1 or 2.
|
||||
|
||||
-e s Replace empty output fields by string s.
|
||||
|
||||
-o list
|
||||
Each output line comprises the fields specified in list, each
|
||||
element of which has the form n.m, where n is a file number and m is
|
||||
a field number.
|
||||
|
||||
-tc Use character c as a separator (tab character). Every appearance of
|
||||
c in a line is significant.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
sort(1), comm(1), awk(1).
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
With default field separation, the collating sequence is that of sort -b;
|
||||
with -t, the sequence is that of a plain sort.
|
||||
|
||||
The conventions of join, sort, comm, uniq, look and awk(1) are wildly
|
||||
incongruous.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
April 29, 1985 1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/KILL.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/KILL.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
KILL(1) Minix Programmer's Manual KILL(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
kill - send a signal to a process
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
kill [-n] process
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-n Signal number to send
|
||||
|
||||
-NAME
|
||||
Named signal to send
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
kill 35 # Send signal 15 to process 35
|
||||
|
||||
kill -9 40 # Send signal 9 to process 40
|
||||
|
||||
kill -2 0 # Send signal 2 to whole terminal process group
|
||||
|
||||
kill -HUP -123 # Send a hangup to process group 123
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
A signal is sent to a given process. By default signal 15 (SIGTERM) is
|
||||
sent. Process 0 means all the processes in the sender's process group.
|
||||
A process group can be signalled by the negative value of the process
|
||||
group ID. Signals may be numerical, or the name of the signal without
|
||||
SIG.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
kill(2), sigaction(2).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LAST.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LAST.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LAST(1) Minix Programmer's Manual LAST(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
last - display recent on-line session records
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
last [-f file] [-r] [-n] [name] [tty] ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-f Use file instead of /usr/adm/wtmp
|
||||
|
||||
-r Search backwards only to last reboot
|
||||
|
||||
-n Print a maximum of n lines
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
last reboot # When was the system last rebooted?
|
||||
|
||||
last ast # When was the last login for ast?
|
||||
|
||||
last -10 tty00 tty01
|
||||
# Display last 10 logins on tty00 or tty01
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Last Searches backward through the login administration file (default is
|
||||
/usr/adm/wtmp), printing information about previous logins and reboots.
|
||||
During a long search, the SIGQUIT signal (CTRL-\) causes last to display
|
||||
how far back it has gone; it then continues.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
login(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LEAVE.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LEAVE.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LEAVE(1) Minix Programmer's Manual LEAVE(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
leave - warn when it is time to go home
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
leave [ [+] hh[:]mm]
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
leave 1500 # Issue a warning at 2:55 p.m.
|
||||
|
||||
leave 10:00 # Issue a warning at 9:55 a.m.
|
||||
|
||||
leave + 30 # Issue a warning in 25 minutes
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Leave sets an alarm clock to a specified time and issues a warning 5
|
||||
minutes before, 1 minute before, and at the time to leave. It then keeps
|
||||
issuing warnings every minute for 10 minutes, then quits. If no time is
|
||||
provided, the program prompts for one.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LN.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LN.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LN(1) Minix Programmer's Manual LN(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
ln, clone - create a link to a file
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
ln [-ifmrRvx] file [name]
|
||||
ln [-ifrRvx] file ... dir
|
||||
clone [-ifmvx] file [name]
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-i Ask if ok to remove a file
|
||||
|
||||
-f Remove existing links
|
||||
|
||||
-m Merge trees, disable the into-a-directory trick
|
||||
|
||||
-rR Recursively link a directory tree
|
||||
|
||||
-v Display what ln is doing
|
||||
|
||||
-x Do not cross device boundaries
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
ln file newname # Make newname a synonym for file
|
||||
|
||||
ln /usr/games/chess # Create a link called chess
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
A directory entry is created for name . The entry points to file .
|
||||
Henceforth, name and file can be used interchangeably. If name is not
|
||||
supplied, the last component of file is used as the link name. If more
|
||||
than one file is supplied or the name refers to an existing directory,
|
||||
links will be created in that directory. An existing name will not be
|
||||
removed unless the -i or -f flag is specified.
|
||||
|
||||
Clone is a convenient synonym for ln -fmr to create a so-called "link
|
||||
farm", a directory full of links to the original tree.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cp(1), link(2), unlink(2).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LOADFONT.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LOADFONT.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LOADFONT(1) Minix Programmer's Manual LOADFONT(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
loadfont - load a font into the video card
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
loadfont fontfile
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
loadfont iso1.fnt # Loads the ISO 8859-1 (Latin-1) font
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Loadfont loads a custom font into the video card (EGA or VGA). The font
|
||||
character size has to be 8x16 pixels and the font file must contain 256
|
||||
characters for a total size of 4 kilobytes.
|
||||
|
||||
Loadfont together with loadkeys allow the console and keyboard to be
|
||||
customized to national conventions.
|
||||
|
||||
If it exists, the file /etc/font is loaded as a custom font by /etc/rc at
|
||||
boot time.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
console(4).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LOADKEYS.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LOADKEYS.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LOADKEYS(1) Minix Programmer's Manual LOADKEYS(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
loadkeys - load a keyboard map into the keyboard driver
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
loadkeys mapfile
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
loadkeys spanish.map
|
||||
# Load a map for a Spanish keyboard
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Loadkeys changes the key number to character mapping. This is necessary
|
||||
for national keyboards that have different symbols on the keys that the
|
||||
standard U.S. English keyboard. The file /etc/keymap is the first thing
|
||||
loaded by /etc/rc at boot time if it exists.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
console(4).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LOGIN.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LOGIN.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LOGIN(1) Minix Programmer's Manual LOGIN(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
login - log into the computer
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
login [user]
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
login ast # Login as ast
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Login allows a logged in user to login as someone else without first
|
||||
logging out. If a password is needed, login will prompt for it.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
su(1), init(8), getty(8), rlogin(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LOOK.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LOOK.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LOOK(1) Minix Programmer's Manual LOOK(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
look - find lines in a sorted list
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
look [-df] string [file]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Look consults a sorted file and prints all lines that begin with string.
|
||||
It uses binary search. The options -d and -f affect comparisons as in
|
||||
sort(1). If no file is specified, /usr/lib/dict/words is assumed with
|
||||
collating sequence -df.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-d Dictionary order: compare letters, digits and whitespace.
|
||||
|
||||
-f Fold. Upper case letters compare equal to lower case.
|
||||
|
||||
FILES
|
||||
|
||||
/usr/lib/dict/words Sorted list of English words.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
sort(1), spell(1).
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LP.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LP.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LP(1) Minix Programmer's Manual LP(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
lp, lpd - copy a file to the line printer
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
lp [file ...]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Each file argument to lp is send to the line printer to be printed.
|
||||
Standard input is read and printed if there are no arguments. Lp
|
||||
executes /usr/lib/lpd with each file as input. Lpd puts the file in
|
||||
/usr/spool/lpd and starts printing the jobs on /dev/lp unless another lpd
|
||||
is already running. If lpd finds any character in the input that it
|
||||
doesn't know how to handle then it will print the rest of the file
|
||||
without any special treatment. This also means that no formfeed is sent
|
||||
after the file has been printed to force out the page. Lpd simply
|
||||
assumes that you know what you are doing. (dumb, eh?)
|
||||
|
||||
Note: Don't do anything with a file until it is printed, lpd only makes a
|
||||
copy of a file in the spool directory when it is not world readable. If
|
||||
it can be read then it is printed directly.
|
||||
|
||||
FILES
|
||||
|
||||
/usr/spool/lpd/jobXXXXX
|
||||
Information about a job.
|
||||
|
||||
/usr/spool/lpd/tmpXXXXX
|
||||
Associated file to be printed.
|
||||
|
||||
/etc/termcap The 'lp' entry describes the printer by the "li#" and
|
||||
"co#" fields. By default 66 lines (li#66), and 80
|
||||
columns (co#80).
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
lp(4), termcap(5), termcap(7).
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
Not spooling a world readable file may not be such a smart idea.
|
||||
|
||||
A formfeed should be printed and the printer reset after a job full of
|
||||
escape codes, but this may cost paper.
|
||||
|
||||
No banner page.
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LS.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/LS.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LS(1) Minix Programmer's Manual LS(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
ls - list the contents of a directory
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
ls [-acdfgilqrstu1ACFLMRTX] [name...]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
For each file argument, list it. For each directory argument, list its
|
||||
contents. The current working directory is listed when no files are
|
||||
named. Information is printed multicolumn on terminals, single column if
|
||||
the output is redirected. The options control what information is shown
|
||||
and how.
|
||||
|
||||
Ls has two sources other then the commands line to draw options from, one
|
||||
is the environment variable LSOPTS and is used only when the output of ls
|
||||
is displayed on a terminal. The other is the name of ls itself. If ls
|
||||
is linked to another name, then all the characters after the l are used
|
||||
as flags too, except that f, r, t and x are translated to F, R, T and X.
|
||||
Useful links are ll, lf, lm and lx.
|
||||
|
||||
Files whose names start with a dot are by default not listed.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that standard Minix doesn't have symbolic links or sockets and -u
|
||||
and -c are no-ops on a V1 file system, since only modified times are
|
||||
stored in V1 inodes.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-a All entries are listed, even . and ..
|
||||
|
||||
-c Use inode changed time for sorting, listing or searching.
|
||||
|
||||
-d Do not list contents of directories, but list the directory itself.
|
||||
|
||||
-f Do not sort (should also be: treat a file as a directory, but that
|
||||
can't be implemented portably).
|
||||
|
||||
-g Suppress the owner name on a long listing (implies -l).
|
||||
|
||||
-i I-node number printed in first column.
|
||||
|
||||
-l Long listing: mode, links, owner, group, size and time. (ls -lC
|
||||
uses columns in a wide enough window!)
|
||||
|
||||
-n Print numerical user and group id's.
|
||||
|
||||
-q Print nongraphic characters as '?' (default on terminals).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LS(1) Minix Programmer's Manual LS(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
-r Reverse the sort order.
|
||||
|
||||
-s Give size in kilobytes.
|
||||
|
||||
-t Sort by time (modified time default), latest first.
|
||||
|
||||
-u Use last accessed time for sorting, listing or searching.
|
||||
|
||||
-1 Print in one column.
|
||||
|
||||
-A List all entries, but not . and .. (This is the default for
|
||||
privileged users.)
|
||||
|
||||
-C Print multicolumn (default on terminals).
|
||||
|
||||
-F Mark directories with a '/', executables with a '*', UNIX domain
|
||||
sockets with a '=' and symbolic links with a '@' behind the name.
|
||||
|
||||
-L Print the file referenced by a symbolic link instead of the link.
|
||||
|
||||
-M List mode before name (implies -C).
|
||||
|
||||
-R List directory trees recursively.
|
||||
|
||||
-T Group files by type, i.e. regular files together, directories
|
||||
together, etc.
|
||||
|
||||
-X Print crunched mode and size before name (implies -C). Only the rwx
|
||||
permissions that its caller has on the file, but they are in upper
|
||||
case if the caller owns the file and has given the permission to the
|
||||
callers group or other users. The size is listed in bytes (<= 5K),
|
||||
or rounded up kilo, mega or gigabytes.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
du(1), stat(1), stat(2).
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
Having to type ls -C when viewing files through more(1).
|
||||
|
||||
Is only portable to systems with the same st_mode (see stat(2)).
|
||||
|
||||
The LSOPTS variable and the -M, -T and -X flags are not found on other ls
|
||||
implementations. (They have there own nonstandard flags.)
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/M.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/M.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
M(1) Minix Programmer's Manual M(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
M, U - conveniently mount and unmount
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
M device [-r]
|
||||
U device
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-r Mount read-only
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
M root # Mount the RAM image on /root
|
||||
|
||||
M 0 # Mount /dev/fd0 on /fd0
|
||||
|
||||
U fd1 # Unmount /dev/fd1 from /fd1
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
M and U allow easy mounting and unmounting of a device by using only an
|
||||
abbreviated device name or keyword. Special keywords are root, tmp, and
|
||||
usr for the three hard disk partitions Minix runs in. Floppy devices are
|
||||
mounted on /fd0 or /fd1. You can use 0 and 1 instead of fd0 and fd1. A
|
||||
device it doesn't know about is mounted on /mnt.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
mount(1), umount(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MAIL.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MAIL.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MAIL(1) Minix Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
mail - send and receive electronic mail
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
mail [-dpqrv] [-f file] [user]
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-d Force use of the shell variable MAILER
|
||||
|
||||
-f Use file instead of /usr/spool/mail/user as mailbox
|
||||
|
||||
-p Print all mail and then exit
|
||||
|
||||
-q Quit program if SIGINT received
|
||||
|
||||
-r Reverse print order, i.e., print oldest first
|
||||
|
||||
-v Verbose mode
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
mail ast # Send a message to ast
|
||||
|
||||
mail # Read your mail
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Mail is an extremely simple electronic mail program. It can be used to
|
||||
send or receive email on a single MINIX system, in which case it
|
||||
functions as user agent and local delivery agent. If the flag MAILER is
|
||||
defined in mail.c, it can also call a transport agent to handle remote
|
||||
mail as well. No such agent is supplied with MINIX.
|
||||
|
||||
When called by user with no arguments, it examines the mailbox
|
||||
/usr/spool/mail/user, prints one message (depending on the -r flag), and
|
||||
waits for one of the following commands:
|
||||
|
||||
<newline> Go to the next message
|
||||
- Print the previous message
|
||||
!command Fork off a shell and execute command
|
||||
CTRL-D Update the mailbox and quit (same as q)
|
||||
d Delete the current message and go to the next one
|
||||
q Update the mailbox and quit (same as CTRL-D)
|
||||
p Print the current message again
|
||||
s [file] Save message in the named file
|
||||
x Exit without updating the mailbox
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MAIL(1) Minix Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
To send mail, the program is called with the name of the recipient as an
|
||||
argument. The mail is sent, along with a postmark line containing the
|
||||
date. For local delivery, a file named after the recipient in the
|
||||
directory /usr/spool/mail must be writable.
|
||||
|
||||
If the directory /usr/spool/mail does not exist then the mail is dumped
|
||||
on the console, so that system programs have a way to notify a user on a
|
||||
system that does not have a mail spool.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MAKE.1
Normal file
118
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MAKE.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MAKE(1) Minix Programmer's Manual MAKE(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
make - a program for maintaining large programs
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
make [-f file] [-iknpqrst] [option] ... [target]
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-f Use file as the makefile
|
||||
|
||||
-i Ignore status returned by commands
|
||||
|
||||
-k On error, skip to next command
|
||||
|
||||
-n Report, but do not execute
|
||||
|
||||
-p Print macros and targets
|
||||
|
||||
-q Question up-to-dateness of target
|
||||
|
||||
-r Rule inhibit; do not use default rules
|
||||
|
||||
-s Silent mode
|
||||
|
||||
-t Touch files instead of making them
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
make kernel # Make kernel up to date
|
||||
|
||||
make -n -f mfile # Tell what needs to be done
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Make is a program that is normally used for developing large programs
|
||||
consisting of multiple files. It keeps track of which object files
|
||||
depend on which source and header files. When called, it does the
|
||||
minimum amount of recompilation to bring the target file up to date.
|
||||
|
||||
The file dependencies are expected in makefile or Makefile , unless
|
||||
another file is specified with -f. Make has some default rules built in,
|
||||
for example, it knows how to make .s files from .c files. Here is a
|
||||
sample makefile .
|
||||
|
||||
d=/user/ast # d is a macro
|
||||
program: head.s tail.s # program depends on these
|
||||
cc -o program head.s tail.s # tells how to make program
|
||||
echo Program done. # announce completion
|
||||
head.s: $d/def.h head.c # head.s depends on these
|
||||
tail.s: $d/var.h tail.c # tail.s depends on these
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MAKE(1) Minix Programmer's Manual MAKE(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
A complete description of make would require too much space here. Many
|
||||
books on UNIX discuss make . Study the numerous Makefiles in the MINIX
|
||||
source tree for examples.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
cc(1).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MAKEWHAT.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MAKEWHAT.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MAKEWHATIS(1) Minix Programmer's Manual MAKEWHATIS(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
makewhatis - build the whatis(5) database
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
makewhatis directory
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Makewhatis makes the whatis(5) database in the given manual page
|
||||
directory. This database is used by man(1) to map titles to manual page
|
||||
names and by whatis(1) to give one line descriptions. See whatis(5) for
|
||||
a desciption of what a whatis database should look like and the
|
||||
restrictions that are placed on the NAME sections so that makewhatis can
|
||||
make whatis lines out of the manual pages.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
whatis(5).
|
||||
|
||||
BUGS
|
||||
Removing only font and size changes from the NAME section is often not
|
||||
enough.
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
177
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MAN.1
Normal file
177
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MAN.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,177 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MAN(1) Minix Programmer's Manual MAN(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
man - display online manual pages
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
man [-antkf] [-M path] [-s section] title ...
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Man displays the online manual pages for the specified titles in the
|
||||
specified sections. The sections are as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
1 User Commands
|
||||
Generic commands such as ls, cp, grep.
|
||||
|
||||
2 System Calls
|
||||
Low level routines that directly interface with the kernel.
|
||||
|
||||
3 Library Routines
|
||||
Higher level C language subroutines.
|
||||
|
||||
4 Device Files
|
||||
Describes devices in /dev.
|
||||
|
||||
5 File Formats
|
||||
Formats of files handled by various utilities and subroutines.
|
||||
|
||||
6 Games
|
||||
It's not UNIX without an adventure game.
|
||||
|
||||
7 Miscellaneous
|
||||
Macro packages, miscellaneous tidbits.
|
||||
|
||||
8 System Utilities
|
||||
Commands for the System Administrator.
|
||||
|
||||
9 Documents
|
||||
Larger manuals explaining some commands in more detail.
|
||||
|
||||
(If you are new to Minix then try man hier, it will show you around the
|
||||
file system and give you many pointers to other manual pages.)
|
||||
|
||||
By default, man will try the following files in a manual page directory
|
||||
for the command man -s 1 ls:
|
||||
|
||||
cat1/ls.1
|
||||
cat1/ls.1.Z
|
||||
man1/ls.1
|
||||
man1/ls.1.Z
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MAN(1) Minix Programmer's Manual MAN(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Files in the man[1-8] directories are formatted with nroff -man. Those
|
||||
in man9 are formatted with nroff -mnx. Files in the cat? directories are
|
||||
preformatted. Files with names ending in .Z are decompressed first with
|
||||
zcat (see compress(1)). The end result is presented to the user using a
|
||||
pager if displaying on the screen.
|
||||
|
||||
For each manual page directory in its search path, man will first try all
|
||||
the subdirectories of the manual page directory for the files above, and
|
||||
then the directory itself. The directory /usr/man contains the standard
|
||||
manual pages, with manual pages for optional packages installed in a
|
||||
subdirectory of /usr/man, with the same structure as /usr/man. The
|
||||
directory /usr/local/man contains manual pages for locally added
|
||||
software. By default /usr/local/man is searched first, then /usr/man.
|
||||
|
||||
A title is not simply used as a filename, because several titles may
|
||||
refer to the same manual page. Each manual page directory contains a
|
||||
database of titles in the whatis(5) file that is created by makewhatis(8)
|
||||
from the NAME sections of all the manual pages. A title is searched in
|
||||
this database and the first title on a whatis line is used as a filename.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
The options may be interspersed with the titles to search, and take
|
||||
effect for the titles after them.
|
||||
|
||||
-a Show all the manual pages or one line descriptions with the given
|
||||
title in all the specified sections in all the manual directories in
|
||||
the search path. Normally only the first page found is shown.
|
||||
|
||||
-n Use nroff -man to format manual pages (default).
|
||||
|
||||
-t Use troff -man to format manual pages.
|
||||
|
||||
-f Use whatis(1) to show a one line description of the title from the
|
||||
whatis(5) file.
|
||||
|
||||
-k Use apropos(1) to show all the one line descriptions of the title
|
||||
anywhere in the whatis(5) files (implies -a).
|
||||
|
||||
-M path
|
||||
Use path as the search path for manual directories.
|
||||
|
||||
-s section
|
||||
Section is the section number the page is to be found in, or a comma
|
||||
separated list of sections to use. Normally all sections are
|
||||
searched. The search is always in numerical order no matter what
|
||||
your section list looks like. A single digit is treated as a
|
||||
section number without the -s for compatibility with BSD-style man
|
||||
commands.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MAN(1) Minix Programmer's Manual MAN(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
ENVIRONMENT
|
||||
|
||||
MANPATH This is a colon separated list of directories to search
|
||||
for manual pages, by default /usr/local/man:/usr/man.
|
||||
|
||||
PAGER The program to use to display the manual page or one line
|
||||
descriptions on the screen page by page. By default more.
|
||||
|
||||
FILES
|
||||
|
||||
/usr/man/whatis One of the whatis(5) databases.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
nroff(1), troff(1), more(1), whatis(1), makewhatis(1), catman(1),
|
||||
whatis(5), man(7).
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Kees J. Bot (kjb@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
3
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MESG.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MESG.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MESG(1) Minix Programmer's Manual MESG(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
mesg - permit or deny messages
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
mesg [ n ] [ y ]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Mesg with argument n forbids messages via write and talk(1) by revoking
|
||||
non-user write permission on the user's terminal. Mesg with argument y
|
||||
reinstates permission. All by itself, mesg reports the current state
|
||||
without changing it.
|
||||
|
||||
FILES
|
||||
/dev/tty*
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
write(1), talk(1).
|
||||
|
||||
DIAGNOSTICS
|
||||
Exit status is 0 if messages are receivable, 1 if not, 2 on error.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
April 29, 1985 1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MIXER.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MIXER.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MIXER(1) Minix Programmer's Manual MIXER(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
mixer - manipulate mixer settings on a sound card
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
mixer [-r]
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
Mixer, invoked without arguments, turns the screen into a sound mixer.
|
||||
Levels can be changed with the cursor-left and cursor-right keys. Input
|
||||
and output settings can be toggled with the space bar. For every sound
|
||||
source there are two, or one when mono, sliders. The input controls have
|
||||
only effect when recording with the Dac. These settings can also be used
|
||||
to switch the left and right channels or, when both channels are enabled
|
||||
on both Dac channels, record in mono. To exit the mixer use the 'e' key.
|
||||
|
||||
Mixer settings can be stored and restored with the 's' (store) and 'r'
|
||||
keys. When the store function is used Mixer will write the settings to a
|
||||
file in the user's home directory called .mixer. The restore function
|
||||
reads this file to restore saved settings.
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-r restore settings saved in .mixer and exit immediately
|
||||
|
||||
AUTHOR
|
||||
Michel R. Prevenier (mrpreve@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MKDIR.1
Normal file
59
Minix/CD-ROM-2.0/MINIX/MANUALS/CAT1/MKDIR.1
Normal file
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
MKDIR(1) Minix Programmer's Manual MKDIR(1)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
NAME
|
||||
mkdir - make a directory
|
||||
|
||||
SYNOPSIS
|
||||
mkdir [-p] [-m mode] directory ...
|
||||
|
||||
OPTIONS
|
||||
|
||||
-m Create directory with mode
|
||||
|
||||
-p Create missing intermediate directories
|
||||
|
||||
EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
mkdir dir # Create dir in the current directory
|
||||
|
||||
mkdir -p /user/ast/dir
|
||||
# Create the /user/ast and /user/ast/dir
|
||||
|
||||
DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
The specified directory or directories are created and initialized. If
|
||||
any intermediate directory is missing and -p is specified, the missing
|
||||
component will be created and no error displayed if directory already
|
||||
exists. If the -m flag is used, this will be equivalent to a chmod on the
|
||||
directory after its creation.
|
||||
|
||||
SEE ALSO
|
||||
chmod(1), rmdir(1), mkdir(2).
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
1
|
||||
|
||||
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More
Reference in New Issue
Block a user